Home

Cadillac 2007 Escalade EXT Automobile User Manual

1. 152 Other Warning Devices cceeeeeeeeeee 194 Outlet Adjustment ceececeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 224 Outlet s Accessory POWET c ccseeeeeeees 217 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ceecee 149 Overheated Engine Protection Operating MOOG wiivasanstngnes eddwsadevaia anini aeee 425 Owner Checks and Services aneen 529 Owners Canadian cccceccceccseccaeeeeeeeeeetaes 3 574 Paint Damage saisie a a e a 505 Park Aid iior snis npara TREN E 213 Park P Shitting INO swsccstieece eee eevee tes 138 Shifting Out Of c cece eeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeees 140 Parking ASSISU A EE E A E 213 Brake iiaee irnn eiaa A aaa 136 Over Things That Burn esec 140 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 230 Passenger Sensing System ccee 78 PASSING 4 fencers N E S 336 PASS Key I ooo cruidaane sunesidnriaszntincsanedsentate 120 PASS Key Ill Operation ccccccceceeeeee 121 Power Accessory Outlet S cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 217 DOOM LOCKS A E 102 Electrical System c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 509 Lumbar Controls cceseeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeees 9 Reclining Seatbacks cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 14 Power cont Retained Accessory RAP a c 125 Running BOAIdS secsi iann 114 OAL E E E E A E 8 Steering FIWIA sassiisosonre utii si nineta adsais 431 WINGOWS soenen aa a aah 116 Pretensioners Safety Belt ccccce
2. The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service technician Your vehicle is equipped with the seven wire If you are charging a remote non vehicle battery trailer towing harness This harness with a press the tow haul mode button located at the seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle attached to the rear bumper beam It is located system voltage and properly charge the battery next to the integrated trailer hitch The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps 391 Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle as part of the heavy duty trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The red black stripe power feed will not be connected to the battery until the ring terminal is unstowed and connected to the underhood electrical center The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Dark Blue Auxiliary e Red Black Battery e Light Blue White Brake Switch e White Ground It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified serv
3. ee 356 Off RO AGM veieren rerna 339 Recovery HOOKS sassssssssssessrrreserrrrsnrrrnnns 371 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 370 WITT its saliccae Boece anaes dechpnaceceda exten sav Puceeny 366 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 219 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 302 E Electrical System Add On Equipment sssini 509 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 512 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 00005 509 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 510 Electrical System cont Power Windows and Other Power OPON Siseseinte aSa 509 Underhood Fuse Block seenen 513 Windshield Wiper Fuses aese 509 Engine Air Cleaner Filter a e 412 Battery cccscctscaceeeeeeecetttiecseatiibeeensmeiepen a 437 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 236 COOMA tesa cvetitueneshnnvinstenesnael captietaieaneenness 419 Coolant Heater 00 ccececeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 Coolant Temperature Gage eee 235 Drive Belt Routing eccseeeeeeeeeeees 536 Engine Compartment Overview 406 EXMAUSL scieecsscsvevbogsateiventaavereeens otecsisvendess 141 Fan NoiSe ceeecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeeeseees 431 OI N ES TE 407 Oil Life System ccceeeeeeetteeeeeeeeees 410 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 425 Overheating ionien anaia 422 SUAMUING sp itceseccavenncactrathosandetedcacshedted a henteas 126 Entry Exit Lighting sicswisicatn
4. Rear Seat Passenger Side Jack Cover 1 Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts one quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the jack cover off gt A Wheel Blocks E Jack B Knob F Jack Head C Wing Nut G Mounting Bracket D Retaining Hook F 2 Release the jack E from the mounting bracket G by turning the knob B on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head F from the mounting bracket 3 Remove the wheel blocks A attached to the jack E by turning the wing nut C counterclockwise Place the wheel blocks where needed as indicated in previously in this section The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the passenger s side top box storage unit To remove the tools do the following 1 Open the top door on the passenger s side top box storage unit Use the ignition door key to unlock it if it is locked See Top Box Storage on page 186 for more information 479 To access the spare tire refer to the following graphics and instructions W Top Box Storage Unit Passenger s Side 2 Remove the black pouch from the storage box You now have all of the tools you will need to lower the spare tire and change a flat A Spare Tire F Hoist End of Valve Stem Extension Tool Pointed Down G Hoist Shaft B Hoist Assembly Access Hole C Hoist Cable H Wheel Wrench D Tire Retainer Jack Handle Extension E Hoist Shaft J Spare Tire Lock
5. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your GM Goodwrench dealer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 e are driven on reasonable road sur
6. cceceeeeeee 78 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 84 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle eee 85 Restraint System Check eees 86 Checking the Restraint Systems 86 Replacing Restraint System Parts Alter a Crash cvsiccsesiivcciesneeeastecteteecensteeds 87 Front Seats e Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down Power Seats e Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down The power reclining seatback control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 14 Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the front seats e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down Power Lumbar If the seats have power lumbar the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats e To increase lumbar support press and hold the front of the control e To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control e T
7. DVD Messages If the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the disc should play e The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e The region code on your DVD may not be correct for your region e The format of the disc may not be compatible See MP3 Format earlier in this section e There may have been a problem while burning the disc e The label may be caught in the DVD player If the disc is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good disc If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Playing a DVD Video F1 Play Pause Press this pushbutton to turn on the video screen if your vehicle has this feature and begin playing the DVD Press this pushbutton to pause the DVD if it is playing Press Play F1 to restart the DVD if it is paused F2 Stop Press this pushbutton once to stop the DVD and retain your current position Press it again from the stopped state to return to the beginning of the disc F3 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton if the DVD is playing to enter fast reverse mode Hol
8. Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night 361 When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out 362 Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid s the reservoir full Are all wi
9. cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 15 Heated and Cooled Seats eeeee 11 Heated Seats cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Memory Mirrors and Pedals 08 12 Power LUMDAPr sasinen aab na 9 Power Reclining Seatbacks 0 14 Power SGatsS seccions one naan 8 Rear Seat Operation eeeeeeeeeeeeeen 16 Secondary Latch System 0eeeeeee 489 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position 0 0 0 0 cceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 60 Right Front Seat Position eeee 62 Security Light cca rncieas ieee 240 SEVICE siana E EEEE 396 Accessories and Modifications 397 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle sscan aunan a 399 California Proposition 65 Warning 397 Doing Your Own Work hessssscscceeeere 398 Engine Soon Light sssmeissisjsisensiissn 236 Publications Ordering Information 562 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 84 Setting the Time cceeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeees 269 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 505 Shifting Into Park P ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 Shifting Out of Park P eessen 140 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 00008 30 Signals Turn and Lane Change 55 196 Spate Tire sessccessnndeetesreiedsassetecsetnsedeeaxtoeseenass 495 Installing cna a eae 482 REMOVING coneissia eua as 478 SLOMAG anie EA 492 Specifications Capaciti
10. 480 1 Open the hoist shaft access cover on the bumper to access the spare tire lock J 2 Insert the ignition key turn it clockwise and then pull it to remove the spare tire lock 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions I and wheel wrench H as shown 4 Insert the open end of the extension F through the hole in the rear bumper G hoist shaft access hole Be sure the hoist end F of the extension connects to the hoist shaft The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 489 for more information 481 6 Use the wheel Removing the Flat Tire and wrench hook that allows you to Installing the Spare Tire pull the hoist cable Use the following pictures and instructions to towards you to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle assist in reaching the spare tire 7 Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable when the tire has been lowered so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening The tools you will be using include the jack A the wheel blocks B the jack handle C the jack handle extensions D and the wheel wr
11. Drain Grate Removal and Cleaning E The Midgate drain grate is located near the base of the Midgate in the cargo area You will find a removable drain grate covering the drain After hauling dirt wood chips pebbles etc you will need to flush the midgate drain with water But first you will have to remove the drain grate by using the following steps 1 Lower the Midgate See Midgate on page 104 for more information 2 Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate 3 Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it straight out Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate 185 Cargo Area Floor Drains Your vehicle also has four cargo area floor drains located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo area These drains should be cleaned periodically to allow water to exit the cargo area The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains You can flush the drains through the cutouts but if the cargo area is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the drains with water 186 Top Box Storage Your vehicle has top box storage units on both sides of the vehicle The passenger side top box contains the tools you will need to change a flat tire Use the ignition door key to unlock lock it Press the key cylinder button and swing the lid open Turn on the cargo lamps if the vehicle has them for more light inside See Exterior Cargo
12. PASS Key Ill The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 120 This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle PASS Key Ill Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key IIl Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system This means you do not have to do anything special to arm or disarm the system It works when you transition the key to RUN ACCESSORY or START from the OFF position When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and erro
13. Rear Seat Operation The rear seat is a 60 40 split bench seat that can be folded to give you more cargo space and access to the folding midgate See Midgate on page 104 for more information on operation of the folding midgate To fold either side of the seat do the following 1 Push the rear seat head restraints all the way down 2 Pull the seat loop located where the seatback and seat cushion meet The seat cushion will release and allow you to tilt it toward the front of the vehicle Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Fold the seatback forward until it is flat You may have to move the front seats forward slightly to do this 4 Repeat the procedure for the other side To return the seats to the normal position push the seatback up and fold the seat cushion down A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the
14. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger s airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued inflating airbag Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear facing child restraint in the passenger s position Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarant
15. currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 353 Driving in Water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try it you probably will not get through Also water that deep can damage the axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on the ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water And as long as the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When you go through water remember that when the brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop 354 A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 356 for more information on driving through water After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody c
16. during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached In the United States some child restraints also have a top tether Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 53 Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Rear Seat The right side rear passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion 54 2 Top Tether Anchor The top tether anchors are located on the back of the rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating position Fold down the rear seatback s to access the anchors See Rear Seat Operation on page 16 Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
17. 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg GCWR Vehicle Weight 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Trailer Rating You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 Ibs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg But let s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well You may add 300 Ibs 136 kg to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight 385 Your vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266
18. 27 C and 32 C 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passengers side of the vehicle 416 Sat Flip the handle up and then pull out the The dipstick handle has this graphic See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for more information dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading If the fluid level is below the COLD check band add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160 F to 200 F 71 C to 93 C If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to v
19. 322 Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordination e Vision e Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinkers body weigh
20. 9 Close the hoist shaft access cover 494 To store the tools follow these steps 1 Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in the top box storage unit 2 Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 478 3 Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack cover wing nuts Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 482 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 492 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle so it is all right to drive on it 495 Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Y
21. NLCK Ges 7 7 F e se RT STOP TAN Passengers Side Turn Signal Stoplamp cdo en stars DSM BCM Body Control Module UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 Unlock Feature LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 Lock Feature 510 Stoplamps Center High Mounted REAR WPR STOP LAMPS Stoplamp COOLED PDM Passenger Door Module Universal DSM Driver Seat Module Remote Home Remote System Keyless Entry System AUX PWR Accessory Power Outlets Connector UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 Unlock Feature LT DR Drivers Door Harness Connection OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist BODY LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature O ArneSS zonne 511 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block Harness i i Connector The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel to the BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 left of the steering column BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 Top View BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 ere Brake Clutch Harness Connector Special Equipment Option Upfitter fa te pa i i x Z z Z ws gt go at 25 5 I x Po a SEO UPFITTER BODY 3 512 Circuit Breaker Breaker Passenger s Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Passenger s Seat Circuit Breaker Driver s Seat Circuit Breaker Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment
22. Notice Spinning the wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting the transmission back and forth you can destroy the transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 476 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn the steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around the front wheels If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak System turn the system off See StabiliTrak System on page 330 Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries it may need to be towed out Or you can use the recovery hooks If your vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 378 Recovery Hooks A CAUTION These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and i
23. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 230 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder 228 Safety Belt Reminder eeeeeeeees 228 SECUN gt sescutaiidesarctalcctatusdadeeineeschetnetenwestues 240 StabiliTrak Indicator sesei 235 Tire Pressure cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 236 Tow Haul Mode ceccceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 242 Lighting Entry EXit rieien aaan 212 Loading Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 372 Locking Differential seperas 329 Lockout Protection ai scccccccisccescieieeessascseees serene 103 Locks Delayed LOCKING cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 DOOP san entree there ert EE E a 101 Lockout Protection cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Power DOOM siccciessiesemasdscucanesveedenarenaeesacases 102 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 102 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0 0 0 0 eee 103 Loss Of Control ccecccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 338 Luggage Carvin vs iiicccn sctinusiieentiiteen ores 166 Lumbar Power Controls 0cccccsseeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeees 9 M Message DIC Warnings and Messages 06 248 Maintenance Schedule MIA GQ ate cepen nanao aaia 104 Additional Required Services 06 525 Mirrors At Each Fuel Fill ccccececceeeeeeeenes 529 Automatic Dimming Mirror with At Least Once a Month ccccseeceeeee 530 Intellibeam OnStar Compass and At Least Once a Year sae ee NESS a
24. Programming Universal Home Remote Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code device most commonly a garage door opener 163 6 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the programmed Universal Home Remote button for two seconds then release Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming The Universal Home Remote should now activate the rolling code device To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming Universal Home Remote Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons 164 Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter si
25. Q How Should I Use a Child Restraint A A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner To help reduce injuries an add on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle With built in or add on child restraints the child has to be secured within the child restraint A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed When choosing an add on child restraint be to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt sure the child restraint is designed to be system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label positioner and some high back booster seats saying that it meets federal motor vehicle have a five point harness A booster seat can also safety standards Then follow the instructions help a child to see out the window for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both 47 Securing an Add on Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions tha
26. Rolling code garage door openers are used for garage doors produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used Programming a rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them 160 Go to the garage Locate the garage door motor head and press and release the learn button After pressing the learn button you have 10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4 depending on your garage control unit If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the owners guide for your garage door opener 3 Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds 4 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To prog
27. The child restraint instructions will show you how 60 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 61 To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger If the top tether is attached to the top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger s airbag A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 50 62 In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear facing infant seat or a small ch
28. The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 473 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 474 Wheel Alignm
29. Trailer later in this section Press the button at the end of the shift lever to enable disable the tow haul mode 382 A light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul mode has been selected The vehicle will automatically turn off tow haul every time it is started Operating the vehicle in tow haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of tow haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Use the following char
30. Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 462 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving 22 Inch Tires If your vehicle has the optional 22 inch P285 45R22 size tires they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use The low profile wide tread design is not recommended for off road driving See Off Road Driving on page 339 for additional information Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustration is an example of a typical P Metric tire sidewall ost DoT MALAS Mecano yne a ETE wans Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 455 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Moto
31. XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada XM offers a large variety of coast to coast channels including music news sports talk traffic weather U S subscribers and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM In the U S at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 or in Canada at www xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 438 9677 i Information Press this button while in XM mode to retrieve three different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY To view this information perform the following 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until INFO information appears on the display 277 3 Press the tune sel knob to select INFO The display will change to show the additional XM information 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek to stations broad
32. e Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle such as hood air deflectors etc may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to
33. engine because your vehicle cannot move easily When parked on a hill especially when the vehicle has a heavy load you may notice an increase in the effort to shift out of PARK P See Torque Lock Automatic Transmission under Shifting Into Park P on page 138 for more information 130 A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on page 138 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 380 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 370 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also
34. maintain vehicle control cause your brakes to overheat and fade e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help the brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 349 Q Are there some things should not do A 350 when driving down a hill Yes These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Q Am likely to stall when going downhill A It is much more likely to happen going uphill But if it happens going downhill h
35. on the driver s side of the vehicle To access the fuse relay block push in on the tabs on the end of the fuse relay block cover and lift To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out 513 ENG EXH C4JC5I amp j ceg c7 af c8 C93 C103 C11 Q HOLPI C123 C139 C143 ea C159 FANCNTRL c63 LOHID 173 C189 C199 C209 C219 C22 C239 C243 C259 C269 7 EZI Eag cat AC cai FUEL f i C319 CMPRSR STRTR TaN PMP ERK LAMP anik C32 C339 C34 C353 er C363 C379 C389 70 C393 C439 C449 C403 C413 C423 C453 C46 C47 C489 C499 C50 C51 C52 C53 C549 C559 REAR RUN C56 DEFOG CRNK za Electronic Stability Suspension Engine Controls 2 Control Automatic Level Control Exhaust 514 5 Engine Control Module Throttle Control O e Rig Tater Spun tame C e Joogen senses SS C o antoak rakes Sen 11 Drivers High Intensity Discharge Lamp Engine Control Module Battery 13 Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Right Side 14 Transmission Control Module Battery Vehicle Back up Lamps 16 Passenger s Side High Intensity Discharge Lamp Air Conditioning Compressor Oxygen Sensors Left Side Headlamp Solenoid Solenoid 515 Key Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Windshield Wiper SEO B2 Upfitter Usage Battery Electric Adjustable Pedals Climate Controls Battery Airbag System Ignition Miscellaneous Ignition Rear Vision 43 Camera If
36. or a similar magnetic item The compass can be placed in calibration mode manually by pressing and holding the auto highbeam button for approximately nine seconds until CAL is shown in the compass display The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads the correct direction 143 Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is driven outside zone eight Under certain circumstances such as a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust the compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the mirror is not adjusted to account for zone changes the compass could give false readings To adjust for zone changes do the following 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map that follows 144 Press and hold the auto highbeam button approximately six seconds until a zone number appears in the display Once the zone number appears in the display press the auto highbeam button quickly until you reach the correct zone number Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to normal operation If C appears in the compass window the compass needs calibration See Compass Calibration liste
37. places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel 402 The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver s side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you loosen it A CAUTION If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 501 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 236 The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC if the fuel cap is not properly installed See DIC Warnings and Messages on
38. s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 235 In addition you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until CAUTION Continued See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 425 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice lf your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle P can be badly damaged The costly repairs a AN Sa Pig coolant would not a4 covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If you keep driving when the vehicles on page 425 for information on driving to a engine is overheated the liquids in it can safe place in an emergency catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool CAUTION Continued 423 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low co
39. system is enabled Turning On and Enabling IntellliBeam Press and release the IntellliBeam button on the inside rear view mirror The IntellliBeam indicator on the mirror will turn on to let you know the system has been turned on Once the system has been turned on it will remain on each time the vehicle is started Additionally the IntellliBeam system must be enabled 206 To enable the IntellliBeam system turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO with the turn signal multifunction lever in its neutral position The High Beam On Light will appear on the instrument panel cluster when the high beams are on See Highbeam On Light on page 241 Driving with IntellliBeam IntellliBeam will only activate your high beams when driving over 20 mph 32 km h The high beam headlamps will remain on under the automatic control of IntellliBeam until any of the following situations occur e The system detects an approaching vehicle s headlamps e The system detects a preceding vehicle s taillamps e The outside light is bright enough that high beam headlamps are not required e The vehicle s speed drops below 15 mph 24 km h The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the high beam position See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 197 When either of these conditions occur the IntellliBeam feature will be disabled and the IntellliBeam light in the mirror will turn off until the high beam stalk i
40. use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle 131 DRIVE D This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 338 132 MANUAL MODE M This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate
41. 00 397 Accessory Power Outlet S cceecceceee 217 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VOICI 6 iis ccdeeiees teueie cet ieee saarena 85 Additives Fuel ccccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 400 Add On Electrical Equipment 008 509 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 128 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cccecceeeeeees 412 Air Conditioning 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 219 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator 006 230 Readiness Light ceee 229 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 555 Airbag SYStOM sscceritesecsmneetdesnestncenneeandeaeuteed t 67 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle oiccen 85 How Does an Airbag Restrain 76 Passenger Sensing System e ee 78 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 84 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 75 What Will You See After an Airbag alos panan iepeeansameMcetddneree teary 76 When Should an Airbag Inflate 73 Where Are the Airbags ccecce 70 All Wheel Drive ccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeteees 443 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 333 Analog ClOCK sca cetaneae esewenecuataeniteaseesnertsanneds 218 Antenna Fixed Mast ccccsecseeeeeeeeeeees 318 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SYSTEM aigron ne ea enaa ee 319 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 a 327 Anti Lock Brake Syste
42. 279 The radio will play traffic announcements if the Activating Program Type PTY volume is low The radio will interrupt the play of i nd XM a CD or DVD if the last tuned station broadcasts stations ADS and traffic announcements PTY allows you to search for stations with specific types of music The selectable PTYs are POP To turn TA on or off perform the following steps EASY TALK CNTRY Country CLASS 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the Classical and JAZZ mam menu To activate program types perform the 2 Turn the tune sel knob until TRAFFIC following steps ANNOUNCE appears on the display 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the 3 Press the tune sel knob to select ON or OFF main menu ANA willap peat in te Dox WARN TAS 2 Turn the tune sel knob until PROGRAM TYPE selected on MODE appears on the display 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the 3 Press the tune sel knob to select ON or OFF display To return to the original display F F repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or er O SSRGISA AMA Mappen ma wait for the display to time out 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed 280 Press the pushbutton for the desired PTY The radio m
43. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 498 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from
44. Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 547 Roadside Service In the United States or Canada call 1 800 882 1112 Service available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and in the United States where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service Each United States technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs 548 Who Is Cover
45. CD FWD gt Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within the track Holding the pushbutton will play at 10 times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play at 20 times the normal speed Release this pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK Repeat Track RPT DISC Repeat CD RDM TRCK Random Track and RDM ALL Random All CDs e Normal Sets the system for normal play of the CD s e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode e RPT DISC Repeat CD Repeats the CD over again RPT DISC will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode 283 e RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current CD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and advance to the next mode e RDM ALL Random All CDs Plays all of the CDs loaded in random rather than sequential order RDM ALL will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and advance to the next mode F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pus
46. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 422 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 438 Battery See Battery on page 437 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 407 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 415 Remote Negative Terminal GND Out of View See Jump Starting on page 438 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 407 Engine Cooling Fan Out of View See Cooling System on page 426 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View See Power Steering Fluid on page 431 L Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 433 M Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 513 N Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 432 Engine Oil If the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL message appears on the Driver Information Center DIC it means you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the ve
47. Door LOCKS ceecee 102 Delayed LOCKING ssssssrniinirenicrisrsasisssiinans 102 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 102 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0eee 103 Lockout Protection cceeeecseeeeeeeeneeeeees 103 Midgate rosoinen Eiee AAEN NEEE S 104 TAIJA oinnia at 114 Power Running Boards secsec 114 WUINdOWS cerci kacara 115 Power WINdOWS 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 116 SUM VISOMS ssscsticacievsenseheigertetdeasnastcnaemateey 117 Theft Deterrent Systems 0 117 Content Theft Deterrent a n 118 PASS Key I cccccescscessesccsesessceeneees 120 PASS Key Ill Operation cccccccceeee 121 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 123 New Vehicle Break In cseeeeeeeeeeees 123 Ignition POSitiONS eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeees 124 Retained Accessory Power RAP 125 Starting the Engine ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 128 Engine Coolant Heater ee 128 Automatic Transmission Operation 129 TOW Haull ModE sicie ieina 135 Parking Brake srenirseserscsrserririssnsis 136 Shifting Into Park P eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 138 Shifting Out of Park P sssiicaarrisssssiiseriss 140 Parking Over Things That Burn 140 Engine Exhaust sc ssisctesasiectesvenceesseaeiireens 141 Running the Engine While Parked 142 MIPPONS sas scispescetvenbengetaginabsen
48. If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer 253 SERVICE BRAKES SOON If there is a problem with the brake system this message will display If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer SERVICE PARKING ASSIST This message will display if there is a problem with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 213 for more information See your dealer for service 254 SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE SUSP
49. Lamps on page 211 for more information Sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition needs to be turned to ON or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active When RAP is active the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 125 for more information There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof Manual Open Manual Close To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed 187 Express Open Express Close To express open the sunroof fully press and release the rear of the driver s side switch The sunroof will open automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To express close the sunroof fully press and release the front of the driver s side switch The sunroof will close automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time The sunshade will open automatic
50. Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your GM dealer Radio ID Radio ID label channel 0 If tuned to channel 0 this message will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only occur with may be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer hardware failure Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your dealer 301 Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See
51. Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer for service Relearn Tire Positions If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor the system must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 462 See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 467 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 for more information 247 Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match remote keyless entry transmitters to your vehicle To match a remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle do the following 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS v TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter
52. Return the remote positive terminal cover if equipped to its original position All Wheel Drive Transfer Case If your vehicle is equipped with All Wheel Drive be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section There are two additional systems that need lubrication When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 443 How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Filler Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 444 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and
53. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors recommends against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving 401 Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some
54. To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section e Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 k
55. When it is ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating 218 Analog Clock To adjust the clock do the following 1 2 Locate the adjustment button near the lower left corner of the clock Push and hold the adjustment button to advance the clock hands Release the button before you get to the desired time Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute increments until the desired time is reached Climate Controls Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats shown You can select different climate control settings for the driver and passengers Driver s Side Temperature Knob The driver s side knob is used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver s side The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is
56. a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints Child Restraint Systems A CAUTION The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in appropriate child restraints in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 45 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the for the child s body with the harness and also infant The harness system holds the infant sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant or shelf like shields positioned in the restraint 46
57. a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object The frontal airbags driver and right front passenger are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts 74 Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the fore and aft position of the driver s seat Seat position sensors provide information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags and a rollover sensor See Airbag System on page 67 These rollover capable airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact A roof mounted rollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof mounted rollover airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts Both roof mounted rollover airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what th
58. after the last door or the tailgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EXIT LIGHTING If it is dark enough outside this feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on This happens after the vehicle is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or if the vehicle key is turned to LOCK from RUN Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 262 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization but
59. against the hub 10 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely 8 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded 6 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 487 A CAUTION Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 518 for wheel nut torque specification Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 518 for the wheel nut torque specification 488 11 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire you must also reinstall the wheel cover with attached plastic nuts the plastic nut caps or the smooth center cap e f you are reinstalling a wheel cover with attached plastic nuts place it on the wheel and tighten the nuts by hand to get them
60. air cleaner filter cover When the indicator turns black or is in the red orange change zone replace the filter and reset the indicator See the steps following to replace the engine air cleaner filter and to reset the air filter restriction indicator Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction Indicator To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engine air cleaner filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6 When you have the engine air cleaner filter removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 2 Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover 413 int at yt AA AD th Aaaa 3 Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 4 Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing 5 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 414 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws Reset the air filter restriction indicator if the vehicle has one by pressing the top button on the indicator Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not o
61. alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 You should change your oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 407 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 410 Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected Tire Pressure If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa
62. and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer and transmission temperature i Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units tire pressure readings for vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system programming for vehicles with a TPM system and remote keyless entry transmitter programming 244 Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information v Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km To switch between English and metric measurements see Units later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odomete
63. away A Secure clip A on the secondary strap from you B Secure clip B on the secondary strap C Place the remaining primary straps on top of the lid and tray 172 3 Store cargo panel 2 by loading the 4 Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo cargo panel with latches down and facing panel with latches up and facing away toward you from you 173 6 Tighten all straps by pulling on the free end of each strap 5 Place the primary straps over the three cargo covers A Fasten the four strap clips B 174 7 Close both cross locks at the center of the strap system to secure tightly Panels 3 2 1 Loaded 175 Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels To reinstall a cargo panel do the following 1 You can either leave the strap system attached to the side of the cargo area while it is not in use or you can store it inside the top box storage compartment See Top Box Storage on page 186 for more information 2 Starting with cargo panel 1 place the latches in the unlocked position Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up 176 Left Side Shown Right Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the Midgate and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with the receivers 4 Install cargo cover 2 next Place the latches in the unlocked position Place the cargo cover panel
64. cargo area of your vehicle or in the top box storage units Some vehicles will only have a cargo lamp in the driver side top box The cargo lamps come on by turning on the interior dome lamps Instrument Panel Brightness The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior lamps control E Instrument Panel Lights Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio display This will only work if the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the knob all the way to the right 211 Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door They will turn off when all doors are closed You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the knob located next to the exterior lamp control all the way up In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override 7 Dome Lamp Override You can use the dome override button located next to the exterior lamps control to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button With the button in this position the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again so it is extended With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door 212 Entr
65. comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with the generator the generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery 232 When this light comes on the Driver Information Center DIC will also display the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 for more information If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner to reduce the drain on the battery Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light will come on when you set the parking brake If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds If the light comes on while you are driving pull there could be a brake problem off the road and stop carefully You may notice Have your brake system inspected right away that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have
66. disc e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc e Make sure playlists have a m3u or wpl extension other file extensions may not work e Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or variable bit rates Song title artist name and album will be available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 e Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less e Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3 disc using multiple sessions It is usually better to burn the disc all at once The player will be able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files Long file names folder names or playlist names may use more disc memory space than necessary To conserve space on the disc minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders The system can support up to 11 folders in depth though keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files the player will let you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum will be ignored
67. fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 407 for further details Notice It is important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 419 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary 529 At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Tires on page 454 for further details Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 477 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and R
68. for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay GB Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings High Speed For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings Off To stop the wipers move the band to off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Rainsense Il Wipers Your vehicle has Rainsense II windshield wipers These wipers automatically turn on when a sensor mounted next to the inside rearview mirror detects moisture on the windshield When active these wipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers To turn on the Rainsense feature the wipers must be set to one of the five delay settings Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rain sensor Since different drivers have different setting preferences it is recommended that the mid range setting position three be used initially For more wipes select the higher settings for fewer wipes select the lower settings located closer to the off position on the mult
69. for any other reason When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver Your vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off you may still hear system noises as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 370 331 When the transfer case is in 4LO the stability system is automatically disabled the StabiliTrak light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the DIC Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by a
70. for current driving conditions If your vehicle has this feature see Driver Shift Control DSC later in this section Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine will be able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear In some cases this may appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally Your vehicle s transmission uses adaptive shift controls that compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes During this adaptive shift controls process shifting may feel different as the transmission
71. get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance e When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle s inside mirror activate the right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your vehicle s passenger side outside mirror is convex the vehicle you jus
72. go off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 380 137 Shifting Into Park P A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 380 138 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into the PARK P position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go Turn the ignition key to LOCK Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the veh
73. high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off If you want to use the heated seat feature after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the appropriate heated seat button again If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats see Heated and Cooled Seats on page 11 Heated and Cooled Seats If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the climate control panel Cooled Seat To cool the entire seat press the button with the cooled seat symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the cooled seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of cooling selected three for high two for medium and one for low Heated Seatback To heat only the seatback press the button with the heated seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seatback off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat
74. if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a GM dealer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity 559 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not
75. if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has airbags why should have to wear safety belts Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your veh
76. it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Notice The chime signals related to safety belts parking brake and other functions of your vehicle operate through the radio entertainment system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications on page 397 Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 125 for more information Setting the Time 1 Press the tune select knob the right knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SET CLOCK appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select SET CLOCK 4 Turn the tune select knob to adjust the time 5 Press the tune select knob to update the time VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the display If the CLOCK RADIO DISP display is programmed into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch the display back to the clock set function The time and date will always appear
77. jack out from under the spare 13 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the hoist end of extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 491 14 Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 15 Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 482 492 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the wheel Alwa
78. know your warning lights and gages They are a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 225 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada similar 226 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer lets you see your vehicle s speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer works together with the Driver Information Center DIC The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running by pressing the Trip Fuel button on the instrument panel cluster See Odometer under DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 for more information If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero For more information see Trip Odometer under DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm 227 Saf
79. leave the garage it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 211 Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps and or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your instrument panel 4 Fog Lamps Press the button to turn the fog lamps on An indicator light will come on in the instrument panel cluster to let you know that the fog lamps are on Press the button again to turn them off Remember fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps The fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is turned off If you still want to use the fog lamps after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the fog lamp button again Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Exterior Cargo Lamps You can use the cargo lamp if you need more light in the
80. less of tread snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric remaining Some e The tire has a bump bulge or split commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 469 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall by the tire manufacturer If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 455 for additional information 470 A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different si
81. more information Fog Lamp Light 0 The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 211 for more information The fog lamps light will come on when the fog lamps are in use Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on See Exterior Lamps on page 204 for more information Cruise Control Light The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 201 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on whenever you set your cruise control This light will come on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 197 241 Tow Haul Mode Light This light is displayed when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 380 and Tow Haul Mode on page 135 Fuel Gage When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank 242 The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e lt takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half f
82. multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturers recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords t
83. not stay in the unfolded position e The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds To reset the power foldaway mirrors fold and unfold them one time using the mirror controls This will reset them to their normal position This mirror has the following features Automatic Dimming The driver s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display on page 145 150 Curb View Assist If your vehicle has the memory package the outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror function This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when parallel parking This feature will cause the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R The passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R or the ignition is turned off or to LOCK This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 Heated Mirrors The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is located on the climate control panel Press this button to warm the drivers and passengers outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow and condensation See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Contr
84. number can be obtained by contacting your GM dealer or by calling 1 800 GMDRIVE 1 800 463 7483 This reference number is needed to order the service bulletin from Helm Inc RETAIL SELL PRICE 6 00 US Processing Fee Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 US Processing Fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 US Processing Fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds 563 4 NOTES 564 A Accessories and Modifications
85. of each cargo panel toward you to labeled 1 2 and 3 Corresponding numbered unlock the cargo panel latches labels are also on the bottom of the panels 169 3 Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the side rails and set it aside You only need to remove as many cargo panels as needed for your cargo carrying needs 5 Remove cargo panel 1 but notice that there are four latches to release two left side and two right side latches Set the panel aside After each cargo panel is removed store them within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel storage system 4 Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and set it aside 170 1 Secure the storage strap system in the cargo storage area by attaching the six clips on the cargo strap system to the tie down locations on either side of the storage area Cargo Panel Storage System The three cargo panels can be stored in the cargo area using the storage strap system To store the panels do the following Always use the storage strap system to store the cargo panels during driving Before storing the cargo panels be sure that their latches are in the locked position The latches are in the locked position when they are parallel to the front and back edge of the panel 171 Use the following instructions for the proper storage sequence and location for each panel 2 Starting with cargo panel 1 load the cargo panel with latches up and facing
86. oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Engine Oil Life System do the following 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle the Engine Oil Life System has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain a
87. on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up 3 Push both left latches away from you to lock the latches Remember that there are four Left Side Shown Right Side Similar latches total for panel 1 You should hear a Po f click when each latch locks correctly Lock the Push the panel forward until it is snug against remaining two right latches on panel 1 the other panel and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with The left latch on the cargo covers must be ihe receivers locked in place before you can lock the right latch If you do not follow this exactly the cargo cover panels may not lock in place correctly 177 5 Push the latches away from you starting with the left latch to lock the panel in place You should hear a click when each latch locks correctly 6 Install cargo cover 3 next Place the latches in the unlocked position Place the cargo cover panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up 178 Left Side Shown Right Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the other panel and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with the receivers Folding and Storage of Straps To store the folding straps inside the top box storage compartment do the following 1 Extend the six strap ends on a flat surface Push the latches away from you starting with the left latch t
88. opened Once the door is closed the running boards will automatically move back under the vehicle The vehicle must not be moving for the running boards to extend or retract The switch used to disable the power running boards is located on the center M console below the L climate control system The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended position Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets Lip in a vehicle with the windows closed is y j iz extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather dangerous They can be overcome by the A 115 Power Windows The power window controls are located on each of the side doors Driver s Side shown The driver s door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 125 Press the switch to lower the window Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window 116 Express Down Windows The driver and front passenger windows have an express down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press down fully on the window switch then release to a
89. page 248 for more information A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 236 403 Filling a Portable Fuel Container A CAUTION Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers e Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete e Do not smoke while pumping gasoline 404 An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electr
90. positions 2 Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know that the position has been stored A second seating mirror and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in PARK P Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat outside mirrors and adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the position previously stored You will hear a single beep If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on automatic seat mirror and adjustable pedal movement will occur See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time press one of the power seat controls memory buttons power mirror buttons or adjustable pedal switch If something has blocked the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position the drivers seat and or the adjustable pedals recall may stop working If this happens remove the obstruction and press the appropriate function control for two seconds Then try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not recalling see your dealer for service Easy Exit Seat The control for th
91. provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry System on page 92 for additional information Q Remote Start Press and release the lock button and then press and hold the remote start button to start the vehicle To start the vehicle using the remote start feature do the following 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the transmitters remote start button until the turn signal lights flash If you cannot see the vehicle s lights press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds The vehicle s doors will lock Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the ignition When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running to extend the time by 10 minutes for the engine to continue to run When you enter the vehicle during a remote start and the engine is still running turn the key to the RUN position to drive the vehicle If the vehicle is left running it will
92. pushbutton to enter fast reverse mode Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode F4 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode 295 F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK and RDM TRCK e Normal Sets the system for normal play of the DVD e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode e RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current DVD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and advance to the next mode F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to display CD PLAY MODE 296 K ort Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the start of the current track Press it again to go to the previous track or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track Press and hold these b
93. rear auxiliary lt lt Volume Press the plus or minus button to increase or to decrease the radio volume DI Seek Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM if equipped Press this button to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the DVD slot Press the button to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD or DVD changer if multiple discs are loaded Radio Reception You may experience frequency interference and static during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations will boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satel
94. station has a message MSG will appear on the display The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed Once the completed message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received To display the last message perform the following steps 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until RECALL RDS MESSAGE appears on the display 3 Press the tune sel knob The message will appear on the display Once the message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received TP Traffic Program TP will appear on the display when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic announcement broadcast capability TA Traffic Announcement If TA appears on the display the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned station you will hear it If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that does When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the display If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements No Traffic will appear on the display
95. station number will appear perform the following steps on the display above the pushbutton that it is 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the Set to main menu sae A gaara lt 2 Turn the tune sel knob until PRESETS ISp ay 1O TELTAN TO tne Ong Mal Ore ays HOME AWAY appears on the display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or PP pay Wen tan dandi lied or AWAY will appear on the display en battery power is removed and later applied f you will not have to reset your radio presets 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home and away 274 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble To adjust the bass midrange and treble perform the following steps 1 2 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu Turn the tune sel know until BASS MID TREBLE appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to scroll through the settings Turn the tune sel knob to increase or to decrease the bass midrange or treble If a station is weak or noisy decrease the treble Press the tune sel knob to set the adjustment Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out AUDIO EQ
96. the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and cannot make it up the hill A 347 Here are some things you must not do if you stall Q Suppose after stalling try to back down or are about to stall when going up a hill the hill and decide just cannot do it What e Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting should do into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down e Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you cannot make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill A Set the parking brake put the transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill 348 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want AN CAUTION to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to Heavy braking when going down a hill can
97. the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program 543 STEP THREE Canadian Owners General Motors Participation in the Mediation Arbitration Program In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after the following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants
98. the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 542 Q Because I have a disability have to get A my vehicle modified How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module rollover sensor module instrument panel steering wheel ceiling headliner ceiling and pillar garnish trim roof mounted rollover airbag modules or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 542 85 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 500 for more information Torn or fra
99. the child restraint will be placed Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger s position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached There is no place to attach the top tether in this position Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 50 for additional information 55 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly Ina crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual 56 A CAUTION Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per an
100. the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 509 Instrument Panel Fuse Block rises Usage The instrument panel fuse block access door is Driver s Side Power Window Circuit located on the driver s outside edge of the Breaker instrument panel Not Used AUX PWR2 Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight Driver Door Module Dome Lamps Drivers Side Turn CTSY Signal PREE EEE Com Cers UTstop TAN Com Rfsror Tan Ceon LT STOP TRN Driver s Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Dnc Coeg Tr ai AAR HRC Crom Exem Css ae Instrument Panel Back Lighting
101. the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on your leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform man
102. the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window vents Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the floor vents td Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system will automatically select Outside Air 3 Defog See Defogging and Defrosting later in this section 222 lt Recirculation Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on When the button is pressed an indicator light will come on This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle It can be used to reduce outside air and odors from entering your vehicle Recirculation may also help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes the indicator will flash three times and turn off The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the blend or defrost mod
103. the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface The proper level is from 0 04 inch to 0 75 inch 1 0 mm to 19 0 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 445 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface A Fill Plug B Drain Plug 446 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant e When t
104. the removable rear glass is not stored properly it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver People in the vehicle could be injured Whenever you store the rear glass in the vehicle always be sure that it is stored securely in the Midgate storage pocket Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is on If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster on you may see a discharge spark coming from the latch area A Latch Levers E Window Retaining Tabs B Grab Handles F Midgate Release C Glass Catch Handle Release Button G Window Alignment D Glass Lock Arrows Knobs 105 To remove the rear glass do the following 1 Fold the rear seats See Rear Seat Operation on page 16 for more information The front seats may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold completely Although the rear glass can be removed without folding the rear seats you will not be able to access the rear glass storage pocket Be sure to fold the seats before removing the rear glass 106 Squeeze and pull down the latch levers A located near the upper corners of the rear glass to unlatch Once unlatched the glass catch release button C will catch the rear glass and prevent it from falling forward While holding the rear glass in place press the glass catch release button C and pull the top of the rear glass toward you using the grab handle s B located at th
105. the spare tire see Spare Tire on page 495 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 461 High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits a
106. the weight of the trailer tongue If you use a weight distributing hitch make sure you don t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs
107. this button again to stop scanning presets The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band LOCAL DISTANT Selection With this feature you can set the radio to search for local stations or stations that are further away for a larger selection To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT perform the following steps 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DISTANT appears on the display 3 Press the tune sel knob to select either LOCAL or DISTANT 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out To search for stations press the single arrow buttons If the system is set to LOCAL SEEK will appear on the display and seek to stations with strong signals only If the system is set to DISTANT D SEEK will appear on the display and seek to stations with weak and strong signals Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six AM six FM1 six FM2 and six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select AM FM1 FM2 or XM1 or XM2 if equipped 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for two seconds until you hear a beep The set preset station number w
108. to a selected speed c Off Press the driver s side temperature knob to turn off the climate control system Outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature knob Press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button the AUTO button driver s side temperature knob or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed A V Fan The switch with the fan symbol allows you to manually adjust the fan speed Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the system on Pressing either arrow while using automatic operation will place the fan in manual operation The fan setting will display and the AUTO light will turn off The air delivery will remain in automatic operation 74 Mode Press this button to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display When the system is turned off the display will go blank after displaying the current status of the system 221 74 Vent This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets 74 Bi Level This mode allows for split air to
109. to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This shuts off the cruise control But you do not need to reset it Once you are driving about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on your steering wheel The vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and stay there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until you reach your new desired speed then release it e To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button Each time you do this you will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce your speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it e To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time you do this the vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed 203 Using Cruise Control on Hill
110. unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 102 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors including the tailgate will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition 259 ALL IN PARK default All of the doors including the tailgate will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset b
111. vehicle 427 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 419 for more information 428 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine set for the proper coolant mixture Wi
112. vehicle s safety belts 39 Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck As If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window move the child toward the center of the vehicle If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 35 In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide A CAUTION Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 40 A CAUTION Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 41 Infants and Young Children Every time
113. vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are driving check now and then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still securely fastened Be sure the cargo is properly loaded e f small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load Tie the plywood to the siderail supports e Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move a crossrail turn the release knobs on both sides of the rail counterclockwise to loosen it Slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Turn the release knobs on both sides of the rail clockwise to tighten it Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure it is tight e f you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will go Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged e After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely locked into the siderail Your vehicle has a Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the rear glass If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not
114. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and low tire pressure light telltale will come on each time the vehicle is started until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure The Tire and Loading Information label tire information placard shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 For the location of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Your vehicle s TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 467 and Tires on page 454 Notice Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the fo
115. vehicles with roof mounted side impact airbags may be hot for a short time The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and flash the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors again turn the interior lamps off and turn off the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features e Airbags are designed to inflate only
116. was damaged in a collision CAUTION Continued 141 Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 141 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 366 142 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park P on page 138 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 380 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
117. you to be aware of its participation in a no charge mediation Arbitration program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge 544 For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 Alternatively you may call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or you may write to the Mediation Arbitration Program at the following address Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Online Owner Center Online Owner Center United States only The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be fo
118. 0 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER Look for two things e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API You should look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle 409 If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temp
119. 0 228 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light c vssiecsetsavtecesvedencesviveensesy 228 Airbag Readiness Light cee 229 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 230 Charging System Light eeeee 232 Brake System Warning Light 20 232 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 234 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 0 cccccce 235 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 235 Section 3 Tire Pressure Light eccseeeeeeeeeeees 236 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ssec 236 Oil Pressure Light cceeeeeeeeeee trees 240 Security Light 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 Fog Lamp Light wwwitieseccevescudeticeevseneeetevonnireess 241 Lights On Reminder 241 Cruise Control Light eeen 241 Highbeam On Light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 Tow Haul Mode Light a e 242 Fuel Gage coiis auai a 242 Driver Information Center DIC 243 DIC Operation and Displays 00 243 DIC Warnings and Messages 000 248 DIC Vehicle Customization 0 257 190 Instrument Panel Audio System S 267 Setting the Time sveises 269 Radio with CD and DVD eee 270 XM Radio Messages cce 300 Navigation Radio System ceeeee 302 Rear Seat Entertainment System 302 Rear Seat Audio RSA eec 313 Theft Deterrent Feature escenes 315 Audi
120. 040 in 1 0 mm 518 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 cee 520 Owner Checks and Services 06c000 529 IMMOGUCTION sisarien iaa eaa 520 At Each Fuel Fill sossa diiran 529 Maintenance Requirements e 520 At Least Once a Month seese 530 Your Vehicle and the Environment 520 At Least Once a Year cceeeeceeeteeeeeeee anes 530 Using the Maintenance Schedule 521 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 533 Scheduled Maintenance 0 cc cseeeeeeeee 523 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 535 Additional Required Services 008 525 Engine Drive Belt Routing cee 536 Maintenance Footnotes 0 c eeeeeeeee 527 Maintenance Record cseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 537 519 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 520 Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty
121. 20 Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle wiccnciccscscsecctperaseveennieenennvees 322 Defensive Driving cc seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 322 Drunken Driving essees 323 Control of a Vehicle a e 326 BAKING senses svedocaede Serco cees ceen ests casacees ears 326 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 008 327 Braking in Emergencies eeeeeeeeees 329 Locking Differential ee eeeeeeeeteeeeees 329 Road Sensing Suspension 00008 329 StabiliTrak System cccccccseseeseeeees 330 All Wheel Drive AWD System 005 333 SEEI o oo eee eee eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaneteeeeeeeeees 333 Off Road Recovery ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 335 PASSING s ccehesaktvertuawathioalanceeaasuscnctmavecnettowses 336 LOSS Of CONTON sissien 338 Off Road Driving ssr senoun isai 339 Driving at Night siessen edatea BUD 355 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 356 Driving Your Vehicle City Driving sensira aeaa 360 Freeway Driving scisncsctvssescsencetes icessncttan eee 361 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 362 Highway Hypnosis scenene 363 Hill and Mountain Roads cceeeeeeees 364 Winter Driving cc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 366 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud ICO OF SNOW somone dena oman anit 370 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 370 Recovery Hooks ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 371 Load
122. 2007 Cadillac Escalade EXT Owner Manual M Seats and Restraint Systems 7 Instrument Panel c c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 Front Seals sevecniderceceusadedeen xcecenassaaddeenseence 8 Instrument Panel Overview _ 00 192 Rear Seats oo cccceecccccccceceececeeseeeeeeeeeeees 16 Climate Controls oo cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Safety Belts oo eeccccceeeeeeeesaeeeeees 18 Warning Lights Gages and Child Restraints o eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 39 INd CA OTS _ssasuruinstsnnsennseuserestenutindarsninrss 225 Airbag System oo ccececesseseesseseeesseeseeees 67 Driver Information Center DIC __ 243 Restraint System Check nsise 86 Audio SYSICMUS asiscssncasdacsiinascacsbecesenends 267 Features and Controls ee 89 Driving Your Vehicle eeee 321 Kays aces teat ett arcade rene ean 91 Your Driving the Road and Doors amd LOCKS sssrinin 101 Your Vehicle sess eects teeeteeeeeeeeeteny 322 WINGOWS eacsicicdersnesccguaadevacotatsndesianntaasance 115 TOWING nssssssssssssssssnnsnrnrrrnnrnrnrtrnnnnnnnnnnnn 378 Theft Deterrent Systems oo 117 Service and Appearance Care 393 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 123 SE e e Sa E E AEE 396 Mirrors Olaann nanana Laaah LaaLa ahhaaa kakanan 143 Fuel arean EES 399 OnStar System nassesisisrisirierisrernen 152 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 404 Universal Home Remote Sys
123. 2345579 Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant in Canada 992887 Front Axle GM Part No U S 12345879 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Propshaft in Canada 10953511 or lubricant Weatherstrip Superlube Spline meeting requirements of Squeaks GM Part No U S 12371287 GM 9985830 in Canada 10953437 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 534 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ACDelco Part Engine Air Cleaner Filter 25313348 A1519C Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Front 21 6 inches 55 0 cm 1528405 OOOO O O O Rear 11 8inches 00e swe 535 Engine Drive Belt Routing 536 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 520 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 529 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Odometer r Maintenance I or Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Maintenance Record cont d Odometer r Maintenance I or Section 7 Customer Assistan
124. 313 Setting the Time eessen 269 Theft Deterrent Feature cence 315 Understanding Radio Reception 317 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 319 Automatic Headlamp System n s 210 Automatic Transmission e sccesoetes oi deivtidesssvteevenn ee tes deudens testes 415 Operation cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 PUNO annie a a anette 379 566 Battery oranana nants Anesiveanawies 437 Run Down Protection ccce 212 Before Leaving on a Long Trip cessc 362 Brake Anti Lock Brake System ABS 005 327 EMGIQONCIOS wccientsienccrne shavennnaveed mae a 329 ParkinG eea 136 System Warning Light eee 232 Brake Pedal Throttle cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 128 BAK CS tee eepaa ce oro IAr aerashegemteavervecautaeeeeeahatees 433 Braking tevive isiiedcsavivedt ac aeiiaieedinaariieeaaats 326 Braking in Emergencies accen 329 Break In New Vehicle ccccceeeeeeeeee ees 123 Bulb Replacement ceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 450 Headlamp Aiming cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 447 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 450 License Plate Lamps n c 452 Replacement Bulbs cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 452 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps 450 Buying NeW TIreS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeees 470 Calibratioi sikeresen inuna 143 145 California Fuel ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 400 Califo
125. 357 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the waters surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining 358 Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water A CAUTION Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and ot
126. 51 There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 51 if the child restraint has a top tether 64 You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 78 We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If your child restraint is forward facing move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat See Power Seats on page 8 When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 230 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint
127. 6 Digital Signal Processing DSP This feature is used to provide a choice of different listening experiences To choose a DSP setting perform the following steps 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until DSP appears on the display 3 Press the tune sel knob to set the DSP setting The DSP setting will appear on the display 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out The DSP settings available are e Normal Select this setting for normal mode this provides the best sound quality for all seating positions e Centerpoint Select this setting to enable Bose Centerpoint Centerpoint signal processing gives surround sound listening for a CD MP3 or a DVD stereo audio source Centerpoint delivers five independent audio channels from conventional stereo recordings e Rear Select this setting to adjust the audio for the rear seat passengers to receive the best possible sound quality e Driver Select this setting to adjust the audio for the driver to receive the best possible sound quality e 5 1 Surround Select this setting to turn on true 5 1 surround sound processing available for DVD A or DVD V sources that were recorded in 5 1 Surround 5 1 Surround Normal this mode is optimized for all seating positions XM Satellite Radio Service
128. 78 Autoride The Autoride feature provides improved vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride Autoride also interacts with the tow haul mode that when activated will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 380 for more information 379 Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 123 for more information A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 380 Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty
129. 900 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak your trailer brake system cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system 387 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 388 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden tu
130. ATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor 51 In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 52 Lower Anchors Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B Top Tether Anchor A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint
131. An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote I 526 Maintenance Footnotes t The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage transmission shift linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints are maintenance free a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine GM parts as
132. Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on off button Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o clock position to the three o clock position If this clears the message s your vehicle does not need servicing If this does not clear the message s then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC your vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated A ee You may also feel or hear the system working this is normal BS The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both systems traction control and StabiliTrak were previously on To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold the button for five seconds The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off
133. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 156 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round LED above the Universal Home Remote System buttons follow the instructions below If there is one triangular LED above the Universal Home Remote System buttons follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation with one triangular LED This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting Do not use the this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming You only need the original remote control transmitter for fixed code programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes See E
134. Displays on page 243 for more information REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low this message will display The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN If the passenger s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE AIR BAG If there is a problem with the airbag system this message will display Have your dealer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 229 and Airbag System on page 67 for more information SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles if there is a problem with the battery charging system this message will display Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 232 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM If there is a problem with the brake system this message will display along with the brake system warning light See Brake System Warning Light on page 232
135. ENSION SYSTEM This message will display when the Road Sensing Suspension RSS system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message will display when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine See PASS Key Ill Operation on page 121 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message will display if a part on the system is not working properly If you drive your vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable the warning will come on in about 20 minutes A sensor would be missing for example if you put different wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPM See your dealer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message will display when there is a problem with the traction control system When this message is displayed the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 330 for more information STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message will display when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been autom
136. ERSE R PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EASY EXIT SEAT This feature allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No automatic seat exit recall will occur ON The driver s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the
137. Equipped Cooled Seats Cruise Control Liftgate Release 45 OnStar Rear Seat Entertainment Display 516 Instrument Panel __ ee Not Used Heated Steering Wheel Auxiliary Climate Control Ignition Compass Temperature Mirror Rear Defogger Airbag System Battery SEO B1 Upfitter Usage Battery Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet Automatic Level Control Compressor Relay SEO Upfitter Usage Climate Controls Ignition Engine Control Module Secondary Fuel Pump Ignition Cage 00 feor CS O e aniccr Brake Sysemt oo Stud 2 Trailer Brakes Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 Electric Running Boards Heated Windshield Washer System 74 Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery Power Reyes SCs 517 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 for more information Application For the Air Conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood Please see your dealer for more information Cooling System 16 9 qt 16 0L Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a t Oil filter should be changed at every oil change After refill the level must be rechecked Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating range Engine Specifications Engine _ViNCode Spark Plug Gap SLE C e Automate 0
138. O Automatic Turn the control to this position to set the headlamps to automatically turn on at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps 300 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps ZD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps will turn off automatically after 10 minutes When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will stay on Turn the control to the off position to turn the headlamps off or the battery will be drained e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps 205 IntellliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it IntellliBeam is an enhancement to your vehicle s headlamp system Using a digital light sensor on your rearview mirror this system will turn the vehicle s high beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions The IntellliBeam system will turn your high beam headlamps on when it is dark enough there is no other traffic present and the IntellliBeam
139. RPA display when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R This occurs under the following conditions e The driver disables the system e The parking brake pedal is depressed e A trailer was attached to your vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk during your last drive when you turned off the vehicle If the attached objects are removed from your vehicle before the start of your next drive the system will return to normal operation unless an object is detected when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R If this occurs URPA assumes the object is still attached so you will have to wait until the vehicle is driven forward above 15 mph 25 km h before URPA will return to normal operation 215 e The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean So As always drivers should use care when backing be sure to keep your vehicle s rear bumper free up a vehicle Always look behind you being of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning sure to check for other vehicles obstructions and instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on blind spots page 501 If the DIC still displays the PARKING For Driver Information Center messages related ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the to URPA see DIC Warnings and Messages bumper and driving forward at a speed of at on page 248 least 15 mph 25 km h see your dealer e Other conditions that may affect system performance include vibrations from a jackhammer or the compressi
140. Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system 302 Driver Control of the Audio System The driver has basic control of the whole audio system If the driver decides to globally turn the audio system off the driver can press and hold the power knob for more than two seconds to turn off the radio RSE rear seat entertainment and the RSA rear seat audio See Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more information If your vehicle has the navigation system see the Navigation System manual for more information Before You Drive The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system may or may not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system Headphones The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs radio or any auxiliary source connected to the auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature or A V jacks The wireless headphones have a power On Off button ch
141. Remote System as follows Press and release all three buttons at the same time to put the device into programming mode Switch Number Switch Position Your UHR Button Example 4 The indicator light will blink slowly In order from left to right and within two and one half minutes enter each switch setting into the Universal Home Remote System Push one button for each switch as follows e Left button on switch position e Right button off switch position e Middle button middle switch position 5 After programming the switch settings press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 8 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 8 choosing a different function button in Step 7 than what you used for the garage door opener 159 Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code
142. Root Directory The root directory will be treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory will be accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px will always be accessed before root folders or files 285 Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player will advance to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files and the empty folder will not be displayed or numbered No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files will be located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions will have no function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files will be located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons will search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT 286 Order of Play Tracks will be played in the following order e Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist and will continue sequentia
143. TYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Cadillac the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 546 www Cadillac com 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 888 446 2000 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer
144. Text Telephone TTY Users o an 546 Customer Assistance Offices 0 00 546 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 542 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 547 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors cccceeeceeeeseeeeeeeaeeees 561 568 Customer Assistance Information cont Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 05 Roadside Service cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Service Publications Ordering Information Daytime Running Lamps Defensive Driving Delayed LOCKING cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees Differential Locking Doing Your Own Service Work Dome Lamp Override Dome Lamps cerris Door Delayed Locking LOCKS sans dvesseuca ennaa daana a a Power Door Locks Programmable Automatic Door Locks Rear Door Security Locks Driver Position Safety Belt cccceeeeeeeeeeeee Driver Information Center DIC 00 243 DIC Operation and Displays 008 243 DIC Vehicle Customization cee 257 DIC Warnings and Messages 00 248 Driving At Night cies cienctisiiicnie ei ite i send 355 EY EA EE EEE E OEE 360 DETENSIVO seriica rodans saa aieea 322 DrUNKeN spiiieninenanidananenkanaeie na iani 323 FIGOWAY sides sudnuctocvewzcacesnende attend atereesis 361 Hill and Mountain Roads eeeee 364 In Rain and on Wet Roads
145. Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 462 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label This label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 471 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected 472 A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 470 and Accessories and Modifications on page 397 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
146. Trailer ceee 380 Your Vehicle srsrsrnrcina 378 Traction Locking Differential eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 329 Road Sensing Suspension s 329 StabiliTrak System ccccceceeseeeeeees 330 Trailer Recommendations eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 392 Transmission Fluid AUtOMALIC cc siscccessiveerceeenenecesteweccesss 415 Transmission Operation Automatic 129 Tip Odometer vscicseccseeeesceatoicersastuedereratnenats 227 Truck Camper Loading Information 378 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0 196 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 008 196 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 213 Understanding Radio Reception 317 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 068 473 Universal Home Remote System 154 155 OPELALION seeseccsseceiecsssmatecensioteadeercuwens 156 162 Vehicle CONTON nea a 326 Damage Warnings ecccenceeeeeeee 5 LOAGIAG eccna EE 372 SYMDOIS eseis eeeeeeeeeeeee cesses eee iea 5 Vehicle Customization DIC c cee 257 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Sit icens crtttockeuutd dial ka ea 555 Vehicle Identification Number VIN eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 508 Service Parts Identification Label 508 Ventilation Adjustment eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 224 VISORS co viedeceaescccaweubonncchenmiachmbavbensemeauegleabetas dats 117 579 W Warning Lights Gage
147. UALIZER This feature allows you to select customized equalization settings To choose an equalization setting EQO through EQS perform the following steps ls 2 3 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu Turn the tune sel knob until EQUALIZER appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to set the equalization setting The equalization setting will appear on the display Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out The equalization settings are preset to EQO Normal EQ1 Pop EQ2 Rock EQ3 Jazz EQ4 Talk and EQ5 Country 275 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade perform the following steps 2 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu Turn the tune sel knob until BALANCE FADER appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to enter the tone settings Press the tune sel knob to scroll to BALANCE or FADER Turn the tune sel knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to the front or the rear speakers Press the tune sel knob to set the adjustment Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out EQO will not appear on the display when in this mode 27
148. We will make every attempt to send your personalized trip routing as quickly as possible but it is best to allow three weeks before your planned departure date Trip routing requests will be limited to six per calendar year Alternative Service There may be times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely assistance Your advisor may authorize you to secure local emergency road service and you will be reimbursed up to 100 upon submission of the original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada an advisor is available to assist you over the phone A dealer technician if available can travel to your location within a 30 mile 50 km radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadside Service Representative e A description of the problem e Name home address home telephone number e Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from e The model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN odometer reading and date of delivery While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we are only a phone call away In the United States or Canada customers call Roadside Servic
149. ace of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up ma
150. ack Press this button again to stop scanning 289 Tune Turning the tune knob will fast track reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists The track number and file name will appear on the display for each track Turning this knob while in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order i Information Press this button while an MP3 CD is loaded to view the Title Artist Album or Folder names To view this information perform the following 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until INFO appears on the display 3 Press the tune sel knob to select INFO The display will change to show the additional MP3 information 290 4 Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that specific information e F1 TTLE Title To display the title name e F2 ATST Artist To display the artist name e F3 ALBM Album To display the album name e F4 FLDR Folder To display the folder name 5 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio CD DVD or AUX if your vehicle has this feature The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will change to the ne
151. adian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 19 Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop 20 The person keeps going until stopped by or the instrument panel something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield 21 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense 22 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Will be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even
152. ag Equipped Vehicle on page 85 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates 83 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 562 84 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of
153. ain without adjusting the volume or tone controls You will notice that background noise is now audible and will prevent you from hearing softer passages of the music To turn AudioPilot off press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu turn the tune sel knob until VNC AUDIOPILOT appears and press the tune sel knob The X in the box will disappear when it is turned off For additional information on AudioPilot please visit www bose com 271 Finding a Station BAND Press this button to select AM FM1 FM2 or XM1 or XM2 if equipped Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations K bl Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the previous station and stay there Press the right single arrow button to go to the next station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band K Scan Press the double arrow scan button to enter scan mode SCAN will appear on the display Press this button to scan to the next station The radio will go to a station play for five seconds and then go on to the next station Press this button again to stop scanning 272 To scan preset stations press and hold the double arrow scan button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN appears on the display The radio will go to the first preset station play for five seconds and then go on to the next preset station Press
154. ally with the sunroof but can also be opened manually When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed Vent From the closed position press the rear of the passenger s side switch to vent the sunroof To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the passenger s side switch To stop the sunroof partway release the switch 188 Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then open halfway and the air deflector will raise To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Express Close or Manual Close functions described previously If the sunroof is in the vent position and there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Manual Close or Express Close functions described previously Section 3 Instrument Panel Overview 0 192 Hazard Warning Flashers ccce 194 Other Warning Devices a se 194 FLOM EEE asec teas E EES A easeetatedennees 194 Tilt Wheel civeneressenciene ets ctceve neninn 195 Heated Steering Wheel ccecce 195 T
155. and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 438 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt 437 Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery or batteries has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty 438 Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems wi
156. and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 363 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 364 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving on page 339 for information about driving off road e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads A CAUTION If you do not shift down your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope e Know how to go uphill You may want to shift A CAUTION down to a lower gear The lower gears help i cool your engine and transmission and i me J you can climb the hill better Coasting downhill ii NEUTRAL N of wilh e Stay in your own lane when driving on the ignition off ie dangerous Your brakes two lane roads in hills or mountains Do not WIN Pave 10 dO BU AAWO of slowing swing wide or cut across the center of down They could get so hot that they the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in would not work well You would then have your own lane poo
157. and tight and fully seated 6 Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6 Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has electric cooling fans you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating your air conditioning system the fans may change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for reservoir location AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 431 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fl
158. annel selector switch 1 or 2 and a volume control If your vehicle has a third row video screen display it will have two additional headphones Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones will come on If the light does not come on the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections The infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones will shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and the RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than 3 minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones will lose the audio signal The headphones will automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side 303 For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly The symbol L Left will appear on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right will appear on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunli
159. ansferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 380 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 373 Tien 374 Example 1 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg A Example 2 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 kg Available Cargo Example 3 Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity Weight SA for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 91 kg x 5 Available Cargo Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE Cc SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross w
160. ansportation program Several courtesy transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required to assist in reducing your inconvenience 552 Courtesy Transportation is not part of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only at participating dealers A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shu
161. ar the shoulder belt under your arm Ina crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 28 Q What is wrong with this a A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it A The belt is twisted across the body 29 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 30 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash To move it down squeeze the bu
162. art of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 25 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body Ses ss f LIN A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way 26 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A The belt is buckled in the wrong place 27 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you we
163. at are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Make sure the child is properly secured following the instructions that came with that restraint Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint 49 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding ina forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 50 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint
164. at the same time for approximately 15 seconds A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK 248 Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message will display when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 410 for informat
165. atch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 367 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm 368 You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Ru
166. ater Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn 503 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Your vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only GM approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels 504 Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surf
167. atically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 370 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 330 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear e One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time e The message will also be displayed if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 232 255 e The message could be displayed if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions e If an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service the message will appear See your dealer e The message will also appear if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present TIGHTEN GAS CAP If the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly this message may display along with the check engine light on th
168. ation press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed 245 Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed Transmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Blank Display This display shows no information 246 Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will
169. audio system allows the rear speakers to continue playing even when the RSA audio is active through the headphones 313 4 Power Press this button to turn the RSA on or off Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary 314 K l Seek When listening to FM AM or XM if equipped press the seek up or the seek down arrow to go to the next or the previous station or channels and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display will stop flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press the seek up arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc Press the seek down arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than 10 seconds have played This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to
170. automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start do any of the following e Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes 99 The additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start Once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start fea
171. available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it MEMORY SEAT RECALL This feature allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The drivers seat will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it 265 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the cu
172. ay not go to all of the stations with that music type when pressing the pushbutton as not all stations support PTYs AF Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn AF on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until ALTERNATE FREQ appear on the display 3 Press the tune sel knob to select AF OFF AF ON or AF REG regular When AF is selected an X will appear in that box 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Radio Message THEFTLOCK This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has been activated Take the vehicle to the dealer for service Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 300 later in this section for further detail Using the Six Disc CD Changer The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems oc
173. back forward until it is flat See Rear Seat Operation on page 16 for additional information 1 2 Place the child restraint in the vehicle near the seating position that you are using 57 58 1 3 Route the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the head restraint If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the head restraint and route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts 1 4 Attach the top tether attachment to the top tether anchor A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 1 5 Lift the seatback up and push it rearward Then lower the seat cushion until the seatback and the seat cushion lock into position 2 Attach the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint d
174. be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called Event Data Recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throttle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance and the severity of a collision If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak steering performance including yaw rate steering wheel angle and lateral acceleration is also recorded This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants 555 To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of GM s defense of
175. button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD When the DVD is playing depending on the radio you may be able to do slow play by pressing the pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD will continue playing in a slow play mode You may also depending on the radio perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button 4 Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews P Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 4 Fast Reverse Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button may not work
176. casting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements 278 This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local and national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is low or a CD or DVD is playing If a CD or DVD is playing play will stop during the announcement Alert announcements cannot be turned off If the radio tunes to a related network station for the announcement it will return to the original station when the announcement is finished ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations MSG Message If the current RDS
177. cated at both top corners of the glass storage pocket to the unlocked position 109 Be sure to align the rear glass side to side using the alignment arrows G 5 Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the rear glass flat against the window frame Use the grab handles at the top of the rear glass to assist you 6 Push the rear glass flat against the window frame and push each latch lever up until it locks You should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly 110 Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in Place The Midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area of your vehicle to extend into the cab The rear glass can be either installed in its normal position or it can be removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket To lower the Midgate do the following 1 Fold the rear seats The front seats might have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold See Rear Seat Operation on page 16 for more information oe Rear Glass in Normal Position Standing outside of the vehicle hold the Midgate securely so it does not fall forward Turn the Midgate handle clockwise and pull the Midgate toward you 111 Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in the Storage Pocket 3 Lower the Midgate until it is flat Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket 112 Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Attached This procedure works the same a
178. ce Information Customer Assistance and Information 542 Reporting Safety Defects e 560 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 542 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center cceeeeeeeeeeeee 545 United States Government n e 560 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone TTY Users sasinen 546 Canadian Government 66ccceeeeeeeees 561 Customer Assistance Offices 0 0 546 Reporting Safety Defects to GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 547 General Motors ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 561 Roadside Service cecene 548 Service Publications Ordering Courtesy Transportation 0 ccccceeeeeee ee 552 INTOPMATION asseio a E 562 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data a 1e10 0 ee 555 Collision Damage Repair cee 556 541 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be qu
179. chor A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer Notice Contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the seat When removing the child restraint always remember to return the safety belts to their normal stowed position before folding the rear seat 1 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach the top tether to the top tether anchor if there is one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 1 1 To access the top tether anchors raise the seat cushion by pulling up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion and fold the seat cushion forward Then fold the seat
180. ck control system which locks the shift lever in PARK P when the ignition is in the LOCK You have to fully apply your regular brakes first and then press the shifter lever button before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 129 If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear 140 Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris e Repairs were not done correctly e Your vehicle or exhaust system has been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle e Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately You might have exhaust coming in if e Your exhaust system sounds strange or different e Your vehicle gets rusty underneath e Your vehicle
181. ck the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 e f you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry System Operation The vehicle s doors can be locked and unlocked from about 3 feet 1 m up to 65 feet 20 m away with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased operating range of 195 feet 60 m away However the operating range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to start it There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 92 93 You will have one of the RKE transmitters below With Remote Start Without Remote Start Similar With Remote Start Without Remote Start Similar The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE syste
182. cle The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Roof mounted rollover airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including many frontal or near frontal collisions and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for roof mounted rollover airbags 76 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After a frontal airbag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof mounted rollover airbags are designed to deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest Some components of the airbag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s airbag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag and the area along the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows for
183. cle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it 209 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps roof marker lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transaxle must be in the Park P position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal 210 There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you
184. cle has the StabiliTrak system and begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control the cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 330 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on B The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel On Off This button can both activate and turn off the system The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off 201 RES Resume Accelerate Press this button to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed SET Set Coast Press this button to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate Cancel Press this button to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed 202 A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Press the cruise control On Off button Get up
185. cle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Airbag System Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger Your vehicle also has roof mounted side impact airbags designed for either side impact or rollover deployment Roof mounted side impact airbags are available for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver and for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind that passenger For roof mounted rollover airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the headliner above the sidewall trim near the drivers and right front passenger s window and the rear passenger s outside seating positions Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 67 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your sa
186. conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride 329 RSS also interacts with the tow haul mode that when engaged will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 380 StabiliTrak System Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak system which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems You may hear or feel the system working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes 330 If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information
187. coolant surge tank is EN 9 W GET boiling do not do anything else until it cools down N IW ares The vehicle should be parked on a level surface Check the coolant level after the system cools down Some amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan 426 A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 425 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your
188. creen The RSE overhead console contains the IR transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more information If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba Notice Storing the remote conirol in a hot area or in direct sunlight may damage it and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the remote control stored in a cool
189. ctivate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch Window Lockout fa Window Lockout The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver s door armrest This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating except from the driver s position Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on Sun Visors Sun Visors with Slide Rod Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can also be moved along the rod from side to side in this position Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull out Extension Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Pull the sun visor extender out for additional coverage Detach the sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side to cover the side window Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver s and passenger s sun visors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a
190. cur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly 281 If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 318 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 282 When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed Load Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and release the load button Please Wait will appear on the display 3 When INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label sid
191. d conditions allow you to use cruise again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 201 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle you should see your dealer for service All Wheel Drive AWD System With this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels at all times This is like four wheel drive but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle It is fully automatic and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions See StabiliTrak System on page 330 for more information Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will Keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a cu
192. d follow the instructions listed next 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 478 489 5 If the spare does not lower turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends with the backs facing each other 7 Place the bottom edge of the jack A on the wheel blocks B separating them so that the jack is balanced securely 8 Attach the jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack and place it with the wheel blocks under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper 490 10 11 12 ey Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable A CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the
193. d previously Outside Temperature Outside temperature is shown in the mirror display Temperature will be displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius based on the choice of English or metric in the vehicle s configuration menu If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time please consult your dealer Under certain circumstances a delay in updating the temperature is normal Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this feature When on the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror face that shows the compass reading and the outside temperature Control buttons for the OnStar system if equipped are at the bottom of the mirror See OnStar System on page 152 for more information about the services OnStar provides 4 On Off This is the on off button 145 Temperature and Compass Display Press the on off button located on the far left of the mirror face to turn the compass temperature display on or off If the display reads CAL the compass needs to be calibrat
194. damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand then with a wrench one quarter turn XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Chime Level Adjustment The radio is used to adjust the vehicle s chime level To change the volume level of the chime press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off The volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD will appear on the radio display To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton 6 again The volume level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL will appear on the radio display Each time the chime volume is changed three chimes will sound to indicate the new volume selected Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes 319 4 NOTES 3
195. dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
196. derhood Fuse Block ccceceeeeeeeees 513 Windshield Wiper ccceeeeeeetneeeeeeeee 509 Gage Engine Coolant Temperature 008 235 PUG EE A 242 Speedometer ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 227 TaChoOmeter a sccisncices fonshasnedtanstietansetieesenxence 227 Garage Door Opener s es 154 155 Gasoline OCTANE sete sass sieisen eaan ai 399 Specifications sssri noninriie sneins 399 Glove BOX sriisinisinisasiitis inicas riekensaiainunan win 165 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 547 H Hazard Warning Flashers neee 194 Head Restraints cccecceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 Headlamp AIMN arseron nio 447 Headlamps Automatic Headlamp System 008 210 Bulb Replacement c ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 450 Daytime Running Lamps ssec 209 Flashi to PaSsS as ss ciaseccte ss sepeetevasinece btaveeteaes 198 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 450 High Low Beam Changer secsec 197 On Reminder s es 209 Heated Seats cccccecccecceeceueeeaeeseeeeaes 10 11 Heated Steering Wheel csecsen 195 FOALS E E E A N 219 Highbeam On Light 0 cceceeeeeeeeteeeeeees 241 High Speed Operation Tires o e 462 Highway Hypnosis ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 363 Hill and Mountain Roads n a 364 Hood Checking Things Under n se 404 FREICASC sits saat suite sans uE 405 FOI iinan e eaa a 194 How to Use This Manual oeenn 4 How to Wear Safety Be
197. designed nor intended to carry a slide in type camper Notice Adding a slide in camper or similar equipment to your vehicle can damage it and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not install a slide in camper or similar equipment on your vehicle Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Service on page 548 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with any of the wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed see Towing Your Vehicle on page 3
198. determines the best settings When temperatures are very cold the Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic transmission s gear shifting may be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal Driver Shift Control DSC Your vehicle has a Driver Shift Control DSC The DSC controls the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by allowing you to select a desired range of gears 133 To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE M 2 Press the plus minus button to upshift or downshift selecting the desired range of gears for your current driving conditions When in the MANUAL MODE M a number will display next to the M indicating the current gear that has been selected The DIC display will show the message MANUAL SHIFT on the first line and the current gear will be displayed on the second line See Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 for more information The number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that can be used However your vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions This means that all gears below that number are available When FIFTH 5 is selected FIRST 1 through FIFTH 5 gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle bu
199. ding the pushbutton will play in reverse at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode F4 Forward If the DVD player is playing press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode Press and hold this pushbutton if the DVD is playing to enter slow forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play at half the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play at an eighth the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to the pause state F6 Menu Press this pushbutton to go to the DVD root menu and to bring up the menu navigation arrows Pressing keys F1 through F4 will move the cursor to navigate the DVD menu Press F6 to enter your selection K ort Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the start of the current chapter Press it again to go to the previous chapter or press the right single arrow button to go to the next chapter Press and hold these buttons to change chapter at a rate of one per second 293 TUNE SEL knob Turn to the left one notch to go to the start of the current chapter Turn it again to go to the previous chapter or tur
200. dio DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage may result Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources The rear seat passengers can control the same music sources the front seat passengers are listening to dual control or a different source For example rear seat passengers can listen to and control a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones You can operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If your vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones The front
201. dry place 307 Remote Control Buttons cb Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off 3 Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight will automatically time out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on 308 Ca Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function may vary for each disc Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the up down left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A V lt 1 Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt 4 Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu L Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button will operate only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this
202. dy for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 239 Oil Pressure Light This light will come on briefly when you start your engine A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 240 That is a check to be sure the light works If it does not come on be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong When the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts See PASS Key Ill Operation on page 121 for
203. e 1 800 882 1112 Any customer who has access to a TTY or a conventional teletypewriter can communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1 888 889 2438 daily 24 hours Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in their sole discretion the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence Roadside Service is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Service program at any time without notification 551 Towing and Road Service Exclusions Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non public roadway or highway fines impound towing caused by a violation of local Municipal State Provincial or Federal law and mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles For warranty repairs during the Bumper to Bumper United States or Base Warranty Coverage period Canada provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty interim transportation may be available under the courtesy tr
204. e Avoiding steep uphill grades e f you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible 238 If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 402 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gas
205. e Restraint Systems 86 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash cceccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 87 Retained Accessory Power RAP 0 125 Right Front Passenger Position Safety RSS ysis si E E T T TT 31 Road Sensing Suspension s es 329 Roadside SOIVICS EE E da Sianeeccatietdaaseeanys 548 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 370 Routing Engine Drive Belt eee 536 Running Boards Power eeeeeeeeeeee 114 Running the Engine While Parked 142 S Safety Belt Passenger Reminder Light ece 228 PretenSiOnelrlS cccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 38 Reminder Light c ceseeeeeeeeeeeeneenees 228 Safety Belts Care OF siinid g 500 Driver POSION scrssnenirsennsicansas 23 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 23 576 Safety Belts cont Questions and Answers About Safety Belts sn ccsssecstceseecn cessseederenmentecesents 22 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 35 Rear Seat Passengers s es 32 Right Front Passenger Position 31 Safety Belt Extender 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 31 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 008 18 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 0 30 Safety Warnings and Symbols 000ee 4 Scheduled Maintenance ceceeeeeeees 523 Seats Head Restraints
206. e and increase the fan speed Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the button again or turning off the engine Air Conditioning 3 Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off When air conditioning is selected an indicator light will come on to let you know that the air conditioning has been activated Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning indicator flash three times and then turn off indicating the air conditioning mode is not available If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light will turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal If your vehicle has heated seats or heated and cooled seats see Heated Seats on page 10 or Heated and Cooled Seats on page 11 Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity mois
207. e as needed 528 h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 419 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k f you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change I Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary m Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any
208. e instrument panel cluster See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 236 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 402 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off 256 TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message will display when the system is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle See DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 for more information The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 467 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 462 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message will display when the traction control system is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 330 for more information TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive yo
209. e may not be equipped with all of them For example more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a front passenger or rear seats Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there if it is ever needed while you are on the road If the vehicle is sold leave this manual in the vehicle Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 2006 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If this is done it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read
210. e the power Young children who get into unlocked door locks switch vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it To lock or unlock the door from the outside use the remote keyless entry RKE transmitter or the key CAUTION Continued 101 Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the armrest on the front doors A Unlock Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to unlock the doors and tailgate Lock Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock the doors and tailgate Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors 102 You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on again by doing the following 1 Press and hold the power door lock switch in the lock position 2 Press unlock twice on the RKE transmitter This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition You can also program this feature usin
211. e tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Anti Lock Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock Brake System ABS on page 327 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a p
212. e top of the rear glass 4 With the rear glass tilted toward you lift it out from the lower window frame channel Use the grab handles to assist you in removing the rear glass 5 Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the Midgate guiding the lower edge of the rear glass behind the three rear glass retaining tabs E Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket with grab handles facing you until the next step 107 6 108 Turn both glass lock knobs D located at Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked both top corners of the storage pocket to position the rear glass is securely stored the locked position Push in on the corner of 7 Push both latch levers up to the locked the rear glass to allow the lock knob to position You should hear a click when engage more easily each latch lever locks correctly The rear seats can be returned to the normal position when the rear glass is out and stored properly in the storage pocket 3 Pull the rear glass out from the storage Reinstalling the Rear Glass pocket using the grab handles To reinstall the rear glass do the following 1 Squeeze and pull down the latch levers A located near the upper corners of the rear glass to unlatch 4 With the rear glass tilted at an angle place the bottom edge in the lower channel of the window frame 2 Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn the glass lock knobs lo
213. e up The player will pull the CD in When a CD is inserted CD will appear on the display the number of the CD and the track number will appear on the display if the radio is on If the radio is on the CD will begin to play automatically To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and hold the load button for two seconds Please Wait will appear on the display and you will hear a beep 3 When INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on the display The CD player will take up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six If you want to load less than six CDs load the desired amount The CD player will time out when it does not receive any more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play If the radio is on the last CD loaded will begin to play automatically F1 DISC Down Press this pushbutton to go to the previous CD F2 DISCt Up Press this pushbutton to go to the next CD F3 CD REV lt Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within the track Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse at 10 times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 20 times the normal speed Release this pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F4
214. e vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof mounted rollover airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact or a rollover event The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving on page 339 for tips on off road driving What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash In the case of a roof mounted rollover airbag the sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severe frontal impact or a moderate to severe side impact The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the airbag The inflator airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger For vehicles with roof mounted rollover airbags the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows 75 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehi
215. eck includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 67 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready e N A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 229 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG l A wy A A OFF ON Passenger Airbag Passenger Airbag Status Status Indicator Unit
216. econds it will play at 20 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode A quick press of this pushbutton will go to the beginning of the next folder F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK and RDM TRCK e Normal Sets the system for normal play of the DVD e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode e RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current DVD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and advance to the next mode F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to display CD PLAY MODE K ort Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the start of the current track Press it again to go to the previous track or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track Pressing either arrow for more than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the button to stop searching and to play the track K Scan Press the double arrow button to scan the tracks in each folder The radio will go to the next track play for 10 seconds and then go on to the next tr
217. ecycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment 557 Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive a
218. ed Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle operator regardless of ownership A person driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for coverage The following services are provided in the United States during the Bumper to Bumper warranty period and in Canada during the Base Warranty coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty up to a maximum coverage of 100 These services are provided at a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the warranties listed previously Roadside Service is available only in the United States and Canada Cadillac Owner Privileges Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges at no charge throughout your Cadillac Warranty Period 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations e Towing Service Emergency towing from a public roadway or highway to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling accident Winch out assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow e Battery Jump Starting No start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Lock Out Assistance To ensure security the driver must present the vehicle registration and personal ID before lock out service is provided Lock out service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your veh
219. ed For more information see Compass Calibration following To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the following 1 Press and hold the on off button until either a flashing F or C appears 2 Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new unit will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time please see your GM dealer Under certain circumstances a delay in updating the temperature is normal 146 Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on automatically each time the ignition is started To operate the automatic dimming mirror do the following 1 Make sure the green indicator light located to the left of the on off button is lit If it is not press and hold the on off button until the green light comes on indicating that the mirror is in automatic dimming mode 2 Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by pressing and holding the on off button until the green indicator light turns off Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is outside of zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be nec
220. ed including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 469 and Wheel Replacement on page 474 for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the ratchet wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Changing a Flat Tire on page 477 The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 467 When rotating your vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have b
221. ed Indicator Canada States When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag 230 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate A CAUTION If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger s seat it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger s frontal airbag A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat if the airbag is turned on Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION Even though the passenger sensing
222. ed additional services See Additional Required Services on page 525 524 Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 80 000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Service and Miles Kilometers Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 412 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Change transfer case fluid See footnote m 25 000 40 000 525 Additional Required Services cont d ae 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40 000 80 000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Inspect evaporative control system pe fof An Emission Control Service See footnotes t and g Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first
223. ee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 79 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s airbag if e the right front passenger seat is unoccupied e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e aright front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time 80 e the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints e or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger s airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint ma
224. eeeeeeeeeeeeas 195 Tire Pressure LIQMt seccssttscncendentcntazanes ohedaatenieds 236 WIGS npaniievonsthantesteanedecenvarkdavannsatcacnbtiddtemstnn ten 454 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels CICANING oo cece cece ee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 504 Buying New Tires eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeae ees 470 KAUN eg E E ative da dase E EE EE 476 Changing a Flat Tire eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 477 Cleaning sopoia a a aE 505 Different Size esnsnsnseneeeeenreeerrrereer renee 472 High Speed Operation sessie 462 578 Tires cont If a Tire Goes Flat 0 476 Inflation Tire Pressure cecen 460 Inspection and Rotation i e 467 Installing the Spare Tire ceeeeeeeeeees 482 Pressure Monitor System eceeeeeeeeee 462 Removing the Flat Tire eee 482 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 478 Secondary Latch System eeen 489 Spare WS sccccassc dbeuesd ayei 495 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 492 Tire Sidewall Labeling cceeeeeeeeee 455 Tire Terminology and Definitions 457 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 00 473 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 474 Wheel Replacement nisce 474 When It Is Time for New Tires 5 469 TOP BOX Storage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 186 Tow Haull Moge ssie ninasi 135 Tow Haul Mode Light 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Towing Recreational Vehicle l a 379 Towing a
225. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 16 Safety Belts cccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 18 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 22 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 23 Driver POSItiON ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 23 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment 30 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 31 Right Front Passenger Position 0 31 Rear Seat Passengers seeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 32 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 35 Safety Belt Pretensioners n e 38 Safety Belt Extender snene 38 Child Restraints cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 39 Older Children was cvietssicdseandsneticsesiedseandateveeeess 39 Infants and Young Children 42 Seats and Restraint Systems Child Restraint Systems eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 Where to Put the Restraint ee 50 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH ooeec 51 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position aaeeei 60 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position erirenisniiaisnnieien 62 Airbag System eee 67 Where Are the Airbags uccse 70 When Should an Airbag Inflate 73 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 75 How Does an Airbag Restrain 76 What Will You See After an Airbag InflaAteS oo eee eeeee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenea 76 Passenger Sensing System
226. eeeeeees 38 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 102 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts sispann a 22 R RadIOS se icistitisiseanitinsdeedecssiardasieteeescneteeeats 267 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 318 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 05 318 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual sson aanas 302 Radio with CD and DVD 6cceseeeees 270 Rear Seat Audio 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 313 Setting the Time eceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 269 Theft Deterrent ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 31 Understanding Reception eee 317 Rainsense Wipers 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 199 Reading Lamps Rear Axle Rear Door Security Locks Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear Seat Armrest Rear Seat Audio RSA Rear Seat Entertainment System Rear Seat Operation Rear Seat Passengers Safety Belts Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display Reclining Seatbacks Power Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Recovery Hooks Recreational Vehicle Towing Remote Keyless Entry System Remote Keyless Entry System Operation Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare TiS sicciesdsaicccasnsencnesascdeceeneswacvenaateaes Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Replacement Bulbs Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government General Motors United States Government Restraint System Check Checking th
227. een rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 for more information Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after a tire rotation See TPMS Sensor Identification Codes under Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 462 468 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 518 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 477 When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true One way to tell when it e You can see the indicators at three or more is time for new tires is places around the tire to o AA ta e You can see cord or fabric showing through eae WAITI the tire s rubber appear when your tires f have only 1 16 inch e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or 1 6 mm or
228. eight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 375 To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center line Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out A CAUTION In the case of a sudden stop or collision things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area injuring you and others If you put things in the bed of your truck you should make sure they are properly secured 376 A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading The label will help you decide how much carg
229. elt cannot do its job either Ina crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 15 Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower B the head restraint mS press the release button A located on SN the top of the seatback while you push the head restraint down a The front seats may have head restraints that also tilt forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint grasp the top of the restraint while pressing the button B located on the inboard side of the head restraint and move it forward or rearward until the desired locking position is reached Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The second row seats may have head restraints that can be adjusted up and down but they do not tilt Rear Seats
230. em does not CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued operate above speeds of 5 mph 8 km h The system does not detect objects more than 8 feet 2 5 meters behind the vehicle This detection distance limit may be reduced during warm weather or high humidity Also the system does not detect objects that are below your bumper underneath your vehicle or some objects very close to the vehicle The system is not designed to detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets So unless you check carefully behind your vehicle while you are backing up they could be injured or killed Whether or not you are using rear park assist always check carefully behind your vehicle before backing up and then watch closely as you do 213 The URPA display is located above the rear window towards the center of the vehicle and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder The URPA display has three color coded lights The lights are used to provide distance and system information along with beeps that will be heard through the speakers URPA can be turned off by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio The indicator light will come on to indicate that URPA is off The red light in the URPA display will also be lit if the vehicle is in REVERSE R If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC PARKING ASSIST OFF will display on the screen URPA automatically turns back on each t
231. en AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle The light on the button will come on in recirculation Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver s or passenger s temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your headlamps To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan
232. ench E 8 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 482 2 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Do not remove the wheel nuts yet 1 If the wheel has a smooth center cap place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry it out 483 A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Jacking Locations Overall View A Front Position LN CAUTION B Rear Position Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 3 Position the jack under the vehicle as shown 484 Front Position Front Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle B and only one jack handle extension C Attach the wheel wrench D to the jack handle extension C Attach the jack handle B to the jack A Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire near the front body mount E as shown Turn the wheel wrench D clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough o
233. energy See Freeway Driving on page 361 e Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal
234. enhenietiee 212 Event Data Recorders EDR 00068 555 Extender Safety Belt ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Exterior Cargo Lamps ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 211 Extenor LAMPS ve vciaserees sedecenetideesteitedecnualen 204 Filter Engine Air Cleaner n e 412 Finish Damage cceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 505 Fixed Mast Antenna c0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 318 Flashers Hazard Warning eeen 194 FIASN O PASS o ennon iaia ni 198 Flat Tire creusant Eo E E 476 Flat Tire Changing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 477 Flat Tire Storing ccecccceeseeceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeees 492 Fluid Automatic Transmission aeee 415 Power Steering cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 431 Windshield Washer ccseeeeeeeeneeeeees 432 FOG Lamp Light secre a 241 Fog LAMPS seosreeiadiiaonss aii aada 211 FOM AXE nuronan aR 446 E E E E T 399 AGGILIVES iniinis innari in 400 California Fuel 0 cccccseecceeeeneeeeeeeaeeees 400 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 404 Filling Your Tank ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee ees 402 Fuels in Foreign Countries ee 401 570 Fuel cont Gage enaa 242 Gasoline Octane cccecc cece ec cece esse eee eeee 399 Gasoline Specifications 0 ceeee 399 Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 512 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 000 509 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 510 Un
235. ent and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment may need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced See your dealer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of you
236. er Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Finish Enhancer Interior and exterior polishing cloth Removes tar road oil and asphalt Use on chrome or stainless steel Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls Cleans vinyl Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off C Beseit Use Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches Cleans shines and protects in one step No wiping necessary Swirl Remover Polish Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Biodegradable and phosphate free Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets Spot Lifter vinyl and cloth upholstery Odorless spray odor Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet Wash Wax Concentrate 507 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M07267 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration 508 Engine Identification The eighth characte
237. eratures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed 410 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has GM trained service people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your
238. ere is what to do Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine will not start get out and get help Driving Across an Incline e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of s lat ff road trail will probabl the incline even worse If you drive across a eee Or IAE AW OUETOAG tal WI propan y go rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill across the incline of a hill If this happens F f f bape wheels drop into a rut or depression your you have to decide whether to try to drive across vehicle can tilt even more the incline Here are some things to consider e Ahill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much A CAUTION more narrow track width the distance i between the left and right wheels may not For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over prevent the vehicle from
239. erify the cold check The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle Sat The dipstick handle has this graphic See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for more information 417 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 418 5 Safe operating level is within the HOT crosshatch band on the dipstick If the fluid level is not within the HOT band and the transmission temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band If the fluid level is low add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure
240. es 0ceee 518 Speedometer sinnige Ria 227 StabiliTrak System srcsisvszssarssnaesenduurcameriiaddn 330 StabiliTrak Indicator Light ccccceeee 235 Starting Your Engine cceseeeeeeeeeeeee eee 126 SLCCHING woe die neinvecleeelien tee ease 333 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 0 316 Steering Wheel Heated ceeeeeeeeeeeees 195 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel eee 195 Storage Areas All Weather Cargo Area ccecce 181 Center Console Storage Area 08 166 Cupholder S cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 166 Glove BOX oo eeeeeeecee ee etteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeees 165 Instrument Panel Storage Area 05 166 Luggage Carrier cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Rear Seat Armrest a n 168 Top Box Storage a se 186 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 370 SUN VISOFS hagann NNER 117 SUMOO aeree ae A A amcdepennsicns 187 577 Tachometer sorrara iiiaae a aeaa 227 Tailgate snaiken dersin rer errr EENEN 114 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps scce 450 Theft Deterrent Radio cccceceeceeeeeeeeeees 315 Theft Deterrent Systems s 117 Content Theft Deterrent cee 118 PASS Key I s scssssscescsccssesscesceassnrees 120 PASS Key Ill Operation c ccccceee 121 Throttle Adjustable 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 Tilt Wheel oo eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
241. es were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled 257 To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK P 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear 258 Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English DEUTSCH German All messages will appear in German ITALIANO Italian All messages will appear in Ital
242. es 502 Inside of Your Vehicle cssc 496 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces e e 499 LOAMNOD s cccedsanesccascedsvewedannteescumanedudeedne aewens 499 Speaker Covers ccceceeecceteeeeeeeeeeees 500 TIOS sesasine a 505 Underbody Maintenance s e 506 Washing Your Vehicle cecce 501 WeatherstripsS cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 501 Windshield and Wiper Blades 503 Wood Panels ivi ceccsseeestwerianieeinen 500 567 Climate Control System Dual Automatic 0 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 219 Outlet Adjustment eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 224 COCK E E vaseaccosuaapitaabermacdes 218 Collision Damage Repair cceeeee 556 Comfort Guides Rear Safety Belt 35 COMPASS ccecceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeees 143 145 Content Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeee eens 118 Control of a Vehicle 00 0 ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 326 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage eee 235 Heater Engine sotiensa aani naeia 128 Surge Tank Pressure Cap sses 422 Cooled Seats cceecececcececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneneeeeees 11 Cooling System osisasiioiii irian 426 Cruise Control ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 Cruise Control Light sssrssiisrosieississisnersiis 241 Cupholder s eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeeeeeeeeeeas 166 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation cere 552 Customer Assistance for
243. es ee Rees ener 530 Temperature Display Sak OP IESE Em ea EE OE 143 Introduction PRE Ube acess E ATE 520 Automatic Dimming Rearview with Maintenance Footnotes eeeeereeee 527 OnStar Compass and Temperature Maintenance Record u 537 DISpIAY scudecaninntserievincacrniecmvynaunanaientds 145 Maintenance Requirements 0 520 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 149 Normal Maintenance MYGMLINK COM cassietectes ees dssavsitessceetnieeesshenees 545 Replacement Parts escencia 535 Owner Checks and Services 06 529 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 533 N TORN Maintenance s es a Navigation Radio System see Navigation SINY oe aa enters teach aoe fee ge Manual ceirean aa 302 Your Vehicle and the Environment 520 New Vehicle Break In 123 Malfunction Indicator Light cee 236 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ccc 535 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals 12 Cen ean eae 573 OGOMCISM seo ieee biia aa 227 Odometer Trip cceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 227 Off Road Driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 339 Off Road Recovery cceeeeeeeeettteeeteeeeeeeeees 335 Oil ENING sesoses besean aiae 407 Pressure Ugit oecsnscenasnnnnenenaps 240 Oil Engine Oil Life System 00 e 410 Older Children Restraints cccccceseeeee ee 39 Online Owner Center ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 545 OnStar System see OnStar Manual
244. essage is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW If the fuel level is low this message will display and a chime will sound Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 242 and Fuel on page 399 for more information HOOD OPEN If the hood is not fully closed this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN If the driver s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 251 MANUAL SHIFT X If your vehicle has the Range Selection Mode and the shift lever is in the MANUAL MODE M position the DIC will display this message along with the current gear If shifting is prevented for any reason the currently selected gear will flash multiple times indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 129 for more information OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a l
245. essary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance the compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 Press and hold the on off button until a Z and a zone number appears in the display The compass is now in zone mode Keep pressing the on off button until the desired zone number appears in the display Release the button After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new zone number will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return Calibrate the compass as described next 147 Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e After approximately five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item e The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly 148 In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push the on off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed T
246. ety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will sound for several seconds to remind people to buckle their safety belts The driver safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds Then it will flash for several more You should buckle your seat belt This chime and light will be repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion LZ lf the driver s belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on See Passenger Sensing System on page 78 for more information 228 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 78 for more information The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more This chime and light will be repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the 2 vehicle is in motion If the passengers safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system ch
247. evel surface e The key should come out only in LOCK 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is Brake on page 136 required Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 531 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only 532 e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Hood Support Gas Strut Service Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear corrosion cracks loss of lubricant or other damage Check the hold open ability of gas strut If necessary replace with genuine GM parts Underbody Flushi
248. ewall Labeling c cccccccsceeeeee 455 Fabric Carpet aies 498 Tire Terminology and Definitions 457 Leather n a cette teeta eeeateaeeeseeeeteeeeeaes 499 Inflation Tire Pressure cccccseceeseees 460 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other High Speed Operation ccccccceseseeeeeees 462 Plastic SUMACSS is ccssscinceassnigicersmensananansvaond 499 Tire Pressure Monitor System 462 WVOOO PANGS oyisini ssi 500 Tire Inspection and Rotation c cccceee 467 Speaker OvVErS sr pesiarn sa Ea EAE 500 When It Is Time for New Tires ooo 469 Care of Safety Belts cette 500 Buying New Tires s is 470 Weatherstrips estes eeeeaeteeeeeaeteeeeeeeeeneeeey 501 Different Size Tires and Wheels 472 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeee 501 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 8 473 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 502 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 474 Finish Care a eeeeeaneeeseeenseneenensaseeneneanaes 502 Wheel Replacement cccccscseesseseeeenes 474 Windshield and Wiper Blades 503 Ti Chains a ccsiccecccantasicdsteccnstasereecedstedscccass 476 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 504 If A Tire Goes Flat aan 476 TIES orenean ia a aa AA a iaa 505 Changing a Flat Tire o 477 Sheet Metal Damage ccecrerereens 505 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 478 Finish Damage scsceseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 505 Removi
249. f it does roll over 352 A CAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels will not get good traction You cannot accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs
250. f you use the RKE transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident e f you do not want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the RKE transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch will not work If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 509 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer 119
251. faces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 339 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 399 521 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 525 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 527 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 398 522 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 562 Owner Checks and Services on page 529 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and
252. feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses your minutes to access weather local traffic reports and stock quotes By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the various topics Customize your information profile at www myonstar com See the OnStar Owner s guide for more information 153 OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Your vehicle is equipped with a Talk Mute button that can be used to l interact with OnStar See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 316 for more information When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory numbers press the control wait for the number please response say the number s to be dialed wait for the number s to be repeated and then say dial See the OnStar Owner s guide for more information 154 Universal Home Remote System Universal Home Remote System With Three Round LED The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held radio frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certifica
253. fety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may provide CAUTION Continued 68 CAUTION Continued less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past Roof mounted rollover airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle during a vehicle rollover or in a severe frontal impact They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes If your vehicle has roof mounted airbags they are designed to provide both side impact protection and rollover protection Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION Both frontal and roof mounted side impact airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close to an inflating airbag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously inj
254. ff the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 485 Rear Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle B and both jack handle extensions C Attach the wheel wrench D to the jack handle extensions C Attach the jack handle B to the jack A Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle Turn the wheel wrench D clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 4 Remove all the wheel nuts Rear Position 5 Take off the flat tire 486 7 Install the spare tire A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts A CAUTION Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The If you do the nuts might come loose wheel could come off and cause an Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use end of the nuts toward the wheel after a scraper or wire brush later if needed to mounting the spare tire get all the rust or dirt off 9 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts until the wheel is held
255. for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for CAUTION Continued 43 Q A 44 What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A CAUTION Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in
256. g a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your vehicle s hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 194 for more information A CAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle 477 When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks aeea ai The following information will tell you next how to use the jack and change a tire 478 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a cover near the passenger side rear seat To remove the jack and wheel blocks do the following
257. g the Driver Information Center DIC See Door Lock Delay under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle has an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program the vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information on DIC programming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them The label depicting lock and unlock positions is located near the lock Security Lock Label shown To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter if the vehicle has one the power door lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Pro
258. ght This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place The foam ear pads attached to the headphones may become worn or damaged if they are not handled or stored properly If the foam ear pads do become damaged or worn out the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs See your dealer for more information 304 Battery Replacement To change the batteries do the following 1 Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to loosen then slide open the battery door located on the left side of the headphones 2 Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks are located on the rear of the floor console The A V jacks allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper u
259. gnals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons To erase programming from the three Universal Home Remote buttons do the following 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Release both buttons The Unive
260. h and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt 398 If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 562 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 84 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 537 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle To help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance GM recommends the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You may also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration may be sligh
261. hassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving e Drive defensively e Do not drink and drive e Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you e Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles e Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your vehicle s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead e In remote areas watch for animals e f you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night v
262. hat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 469 459 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 473 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the orig
263. hbutton again to display CD PLAY MODE K or Seek Press the left single arrow to go to the start of the current track Press it again to go to the previous track or press the right single arrow to go to the start of the next track Pressing either arrow for more than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the button to stop searching and to play the track 284 K l Scan Press this double arrow button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds and then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio CD DVD or AUX if your vehicle has this feature The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will change to the next available source either DVD AUX auxiliary if your vehicle has this feature or radio A Eject Press this button to eject the CD that is currently playing or press and hold this button to eject all of the CDs loaded You will hear a beep Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off If the CD is not removed after a short time the CD will be brought back into the CD player for storage Using an MP3 CD MP3 Format If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R
264. he compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors The outside power foldaway mirror controls are located on the driver s door armrest e Press A to select the drivers side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press A again to deselect the mirror e Press B to select the passenger s side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press B again to deselect the mirror e Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position e Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position If the mirrors are accidentally folded unfolded manually they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position If this happens you will need to reset the mirrors See Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors next 149 Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the following occurs e The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded e The mirrors will
265. he defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 149 224 Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Outlet Adjustment Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle There are also air outlets on the rear of the center console for rear seat passenger use Move the louvers up or down Use the rotary knob next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers For the most efficient airflow and temperature control keep the outlet in the fully opened position Operation Tips e Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows e Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle
266. he differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 0 mm to 1 8 inch 3 2 mm below the filler plug hole e When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if the vehicle is damaged in an accident the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be adjusted It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted It is possible however to re aim the headlamps as described in the following procedure The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows e The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall or other flat surface e The vehicle must have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface e The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface e The vehicle should not have any sno
267. he hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries 34 The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body There is one guide for each rear passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head Outboard Position shown 1 Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seatback for the outboard positions For the center position remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seatback 35 2 Slide the gu
268. he wrong kind of fluid in your brake on page 501 When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 435 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 436 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your
269. her vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 454 359 City Driving L 7 Be ee baw z a LE p he TIT TI A us eo aE Aes FE TL H MRAN Ze 722 pl ART NE E See y A J c ey ZIPS Le y ZIA 7 One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 360 Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving e Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip e Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and
270. hicle must be on level ground 407 The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick you will need to add at least one quart liter of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 518 408 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for the location of the engine oil fill cap 7 AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 4
271. hicle with children 91 Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition door locks tailgate and side storage boxes If you ever lose your keys your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 548 for more information 92 Remote Keyless Entry System Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in operating range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Che
272. his button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and release the load button Please Wait will appear on the display 3 When INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in When a CD is inserted CD will appear on the display the number of the CD and the track number will appear on the display if the radio is on If the radio is on the CD will begin to play automatically If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source 287 As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scra
273. hould always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery The remote positive terminal if equipped is located under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover D G ai GS gt fh i Bs gt Dy Car GF The remote negative terminal is a stud located on the right front of the engine where the negative battery cable attaches See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for more information on the location of the remote positive and remote negative terminals 439 Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan do not explosive gas could be present A CAUTION Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you Using a match near a battery can cause accidentally get it in your eyes or on your battery gas to explode People have been skin flush the place with water and get hurt doing this and some have been medical help immediately blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light CAUTION Contin
274. ian FRANCAIS French All messages will appear in French ESPANOL Spanish All messages will appear in Spanish ARABIC All messages will appear in Arabic NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 102 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors including the tailgate will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors including the tailgate will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically
275. ibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e You approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e You have less time to react e You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e You will need more distance for braking especially since you are on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose conirol and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut
276. ic fan A CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release near the center of the grille Push the secondary hood release to the right Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches 152 mm from the closed position pause then push the front center of the hood with a swift firm motion to fully close the hood 405 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 6 2L engine here is what you will see G H J onnan nT fz ARP les lt 406 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 412 Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 412 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 426 and
277. ice center 392 Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating CWR CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside but you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicles CWR Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or GAWR If you are using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 380 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care ORVICE oriana e a naai 396 Accessories and Modifications 0 397 California Proposition 65 Warning 397 Doing Your Own Service Work 0 398 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeees 399 Fuel geciieeesrcndiscentivoenvnetictiideesdneesties 399 Gasoline Octane ccecceeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeees 399 Gasoline Specifications 0 cceeeee 399 California Fuel secagem 400 FAAS E E E E A E 400 Fuels in Foreign Countries a e 401 Filling the Tank asssesssseserrresrrrrrssrrrrenerrne 402 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 404 Checking Things Under
278. ickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager 542 STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the United States contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day by calling 1 800 458 8006 In Canada contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 888 446 2000 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE United States Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with
279. icle If your vehicle will not start Roadside Service will arrange to have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealership In the United States replacement keys made at the customer s expense will be delivered within 10 miles Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station approximately 5 in the United States and 10 litres in Canada Service to provide diesel may be restricted For safety reasons propane and other alternative fuels will not be provided through this service 549 550 Flat Tire Change Covers change only Installation of your spare tire in good condition will be covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure Trip Interruption If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car Additional Services for Canadian Customers Trip Routing Service Upon request Cadillac Roadside Service will send you detailed computer personalized maps highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination anywhere in North America along with any helpful travel information we may have pertaining to your trip To request this service please call us toll free at 1 800 268 6800
280. icle see Older Children on page 39 or Infants and Young Children on page 42 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 23 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across 24 Push the latch plate into the buckle until Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 30 you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 38 6 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt Tn KY iy l ay AN INSA ew S K Nj g AO The lap p
281. icle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park P on page 138 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK P 139 Shifting Out of Park P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lo
282. id any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to v
283. ide under and past the belt The 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies elastic cord must be under the belt Then flat The elastic cord must be under the belt place the guide over the belt and insert the and the guide on top two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 36 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 32 Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seatback 37 Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger Although you cannot see them they are located on the retractor part of the safety belts They help the safety belts reduce a person s forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal near frontal rear or side crash or a rollover Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system See Re
284. ifunction lever The rain sensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from off to high speed according to the weather conditions The wipers can be left in a Rainsense mode even when it is not raining When Rainsense II is active the headlamps will turn on automatically after approximately eight wipes The headlamps will turn off if the wiper switch is set to a delay position and there have been no wipes for approximately three minutes or if the wiper switch is turned to the off position If it is dark outside the headlamps will remain on Notice Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash 199 Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision W Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed Heated Windshield Washer If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer fluid system it may be used to help clear ice snow tree sap or bugs from your windshield 200 The button is located in the switchbank under the climate controls Push the heated washe
285. ild in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat is detected See Passenger Sensing System on page 78 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 230 for more information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys If you need to secure a forward facing child z restraint in the right front seat position move the A CAUTION seat as far eae it will go eee securing the forward facing child restraint See Power Seats A child in a rear facing child restraint can on page 8 be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear facing child restraint in the passenger s position Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off 63 If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page
286. ile your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 397 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required 237 If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations
287. ill appear on the display above the pushbutton that it is set to Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton To set the preset stations with an equalization setting DSP digital signal processing setting or a PTY program type setting see each of these features later in this section When a preset station is selected once one of these additional settings is selected the preset station will remember each setting and it will remain active until the setting is selected off for that preset station AUTOSTORE PRESETS To set the preset stations automatically perform the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main menu 4 Turn the tune sel knob until AUTOSTORE PRESETS appears on the display 273 5 Press the tune sel knob to select PRESETS HOME AWAY This feature gives you AUTOSTORE will appear on the display the ability to store two different kinds of station The radio will automatically search the band presets HOME can be used for stations available and select and store the six radio stations with where you live and AWAY can be for stations the strongest signal The stations will be available outside of your local broadcasting area stored by signal strength not sequential order To set preset stations for home and away The set preset
288. ime the vehicle is started How the System Works When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R the rear display will briefly come on to let you know the display is operating correctly URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R The system does not work at a reverse speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h To remind you of this the red light on the rear display will flash How the System Works when Backing If the shift lever is in REVERSE R URPA detects objects close to the rear bumper The first time an object is detected a single beep will sound If an object is detected at a REVERSE R speed between 0 mph 0 km h and 5 mph 8 km h the following describes what will occur based on your distance to a detected object located behind the vehicle e At distances between 40 inches 1 m and 8 ft 2 5 m a single amber light will come on e At distances between 23 inches 0 6 m and 40 inches 1 m both amber lights will be on e At distances between 12 inches 0 3 m and 23 inches 0 6 m all three lights amber amber red will be on e At distances less than 12 inches 0 3 m a beeping sound will repeat for a short time and all three lights amber amber red will flash When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC screen and a red light will come on the U
289. inal equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 460 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat e Tire overloading e Premature or irregular wear e Poor handling e Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following e Unusual wear e Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar below the driver s door lock post striker This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the spare tire For additional information regarding
290. infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This by appropriate restraints Young children should includes infants and all other children Neither the not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone distance traveled nor the age and size of the unless there is no other choice Instead they need traveler changes the need for everyone to use to use a child restraint safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be Z CAUTION restrained while in a vehicle People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts 42 CAUTION Continued adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
291. ing Your Vehicle 0 ceeeeeeeeees 372 Truck Camper Loading Information 378 TOWING sasira ianea n Aedeeneetaeeceeeecatesddeess 378 Towing Your Vehicle scence 378 Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 379 Autoride oi srcckssiinnrcestudenaivancateseievasenreudeces 379 Towing a Trailer ssissenescccsurnnsrenmou 380 Trailer Recommendations cecceeeeees 392 321 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle A CAUTION Defensive driving really means Be ready Defensive Driving for anything On city streets rural roads The best advice anyone can give about driving is or expressways it means Always expect Drive defensively the unexpected Assume that pedestrians Please start with a very important safety device in or other drivers are going to be careless your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts They and make mistakes Anticipate what they Are for Everyone on page 78 might do and be ready Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do these things or pull off the road in a safe place to do them These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life
292. instructions will show you how 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle out of the retractor to set the lock the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 65 6 66 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 8 If the airbag is off the off indicator will come on and stay on when the key is turned to RUN or START If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint lf after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehi
293. ion on how to reset the message This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle or until the message is reset See Engine Oil on page 407 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message will display when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires need to be checked This message will also display LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label See Tires on page 454 Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 The DIC display also shows the tire pressure values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle information button See DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light will come on See Tire Pressure Light on page 236 DRIVER DOOR OPEN If the driver s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstruct
294. ions features like all wheel drive help make it much better suited for off road use than a conventional passenger car Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off road obstacles But your vehicle does not have features like special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear range things that are usually thought necessary for extended or severe off road service This guide is for operating your vehicle off paved roads Also see Braking on page 326 Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you have left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes are not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle you can remove the front fascia lower air dam The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by two bolts and 10 snap features The bolts and snap features are accessible from underneath the front fascia 339 The following steps must be performed on the bolts a
295. ions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 249 ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message will display when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 235 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor will turn back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to your engine ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL If your vehicle has an oil level sensor and the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will display Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will clear This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle See Engine Oil on page 407 for additional information 250 ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 422 for more information This message will display when the engine coolant temperatu
296. ions setting the tone and adjusting the speakers 267 Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them A CAUTION This system provides you with a far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving For more information see Defensive Driving on page 322 268 Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving While your vehicle is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its controls e Familiarize yourself with its operation e Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added
297. is feature is located on the drivers door between buttons 1 and 2 With the vehicle in PARK P the exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button You will hear a single beep The driver s seat will move back If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver Information Center DIC automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition See EASY EXIT SEAT under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information Further programming for the memory seat feature can be done using the DIC You can select the automatic easy exit seat feature or the remote memory seat recall feature For programming information see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 13 Power Reclining Seatbacks Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown The controls for the power reclining seatback are AN CAUTION located on the outboard side of the front seats behind the power seat control Sitting in a reclined position when your e To recline the seatback tilt the top of the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous control rearward Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined e To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of like this the control forward CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap b
298. is shut off and then restarted See Brake System Warning Light on page 232 The ABS warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem StabiliTrak Indicator Light 7 ee This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started If the warning light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If it stays on or comes on when you are driving there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak system and your vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system is off and will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak system is active If the StabiliTrak system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service See StabiliTrak System on page 330 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the indicator on the gage moves towards the shaded in thermostat it means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 422 235 Tire P
299. ision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible 355 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it 356 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving t
300. ituad ceseuendansaubenoneys 143 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Intellibeam OnStar Compass and Temperature Display ceeeeeeeeeee ee 143 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display icece2suss cacesesnncstayevedsse sai vescsexmncdee ts 145 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 149 Section 2 Features and Controls OnStar System ccccccccccecsceseeeeteeees 152 Universal Home Remote System 154 Universal Home Remote System With Three Round LED 154 Universal Home Remote System With One Triangular LED 000 155 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED 156 Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED 162 90 Storage Areas eerren 165 GIOVE BOX ssion dinie aaa e ida 165 Cupholder S aniier 166 Instrument Panel Storage Area c 166 Center Console Storage Area o s 166 Luggage Carrier eseese 166 Rear Seat Armrest a se 168 Cargo Cover Panels eese 168 All Weather Cargo Area ecce 181 TOp Box Storage srseiicsrnannnnr e 186 SUNMOOF xs sievsiee es eines eve een 187 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The children or others could be badly injured or even killed Do not leave the keys in a ve
301. kg and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds 318 kg from your trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits Your maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But you must still consider the effect on the rear axle Because your rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg you can only put 900 Ibs 408 kg on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg 386 It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle or the GAWR including
302. lease the pushbutton to return to normal play mode A quick press of this pushbutton will advance to the next folder F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK and RDM TRCK e Normal Sets the system for normal play of the DVD e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode e RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current DVD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play and advance to the next mode F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to display CD PLAY MODE K ort Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the start of the current track Press it again to go to the previous track or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track Press and hold these buttons to change tracks at a rate of one per second 297 TUNE SEL knob Turn to the left one notch to go to the start of the current track Turn it again to go to the previous track or turn to the right one notch to go to the next track K l Scan Press this double arrow button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds and then go on to the next track Press this button again to s
303. lite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time The radio may display No Signl to indicate interference 317 Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly or not at all If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 318 Care of the CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being
304. litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or e share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes 556 Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data If your vehicle has OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty R
305. ll flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press and hold down the two outside Universal Home Remote buttons releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the desired Universal Home Remote button and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section buttons Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 under
306. ll the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil ask your dealer a service station ora local recycling center for help 411 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter and the air filter restriction indicator if the vehicle has one 412 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator it lets you know when the engine air cleaner filter needs to be replaced On vehicles with a restriction indicator you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner filter when the indicator tells you to On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 83 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction Indicator Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine
307. llowing order driver s side front tire passengers side front tire passengers side rear tire and drivers side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your GM dealer for service The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall You will have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off 3 Using the DIC press the vehicle information button until the PRESS TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays 4 Press the set reset button The horn will sound twice to indicate the TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message will display 5 Start with the driver s side front tire 465 6 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which make take up to 30 seconds to sou
308. lly through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has been played play will continue from the first track of the first playlist e lf the CD does not contain any playlists and then play will begin from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have been played play will continue from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play will begin again at the first track of the first folder or root directory When play enters a new folder the display will not automatically show the new folder name The new track name will appear on the display File System and Naming The song name that will be displayed will be the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag and then the radio will display the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages will be shortened The display will not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename will not be displayed Preprogrammed Playlists You can access preprogrammed playlists which were created by WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software however you will not have editing capability These playlists will be treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Load Press t
309. low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated 463 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists 464 When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
310. lts Properly 23 I Ignition POSitiONS s sssirssareseiniisrnr nir siraasa 124 Infants and Young Children Restraints 42 Inflation Tire Pressure oseese 460 Instrument Panel OVEIVICW OEE 192 Storage Area ssursirsiiisaisi n idaga 166 Instrument Panel I P BriQHINOSS csccctecesessrenstanntiencemetbenagenttatioess 211 Bl e T ETE AN A 226 J JUMP Starting ssorisrodi isgeria 438 K Keyless Entry System n 92 KOYS sacsvinieenciiedieaeavenecneaieenededavees eau everecna ree 91 571 Labeling Tire Sidewall cccecceceeeeeeeeees 455 Lamps Battery Run Down Protection 00 212 DOMO N e 212 Dome Lamp Override sase 212 SAE TE EE E E A 204 Exterior Cargo cceeeeeceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaees 211 FOG erupsi aa i 211 FREAGING merren ena 212 LATCH System Child Restraints mriirnsrisinsicmsseisssis 51 License Plate LAMPS scce 452 Light Airbag Readiness aissein 229 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 234 Brake System Warning ccccceeceeeeeees 232 Charging System 00cccceeeeeeeeesteteeeeeeees 232 Cruise Control ive iites nesteeeaetitvegenesddeeaa dives 241 Fog LAMP eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeees 241 Highbeam On ssid ietntiiiee tien neti 241 Lights On Reminder 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 Malfunction Indicator ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Oil PRESSUNC sicciadectedasvicdexiee nisccealndecananes cece 240 572 Light cont
311. lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 535 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine GM parts Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 410 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I a
312. luster If your vehicle has the DIC feature a message to check the pressure in a specific tire will also appear on the DIC display The low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message on the DIC display will appear at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 You may notice during cooler weather conditions that the tire pressure monitor light located on the instrument panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive the vehicle This could be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a
313. m Q Remote Vehicle Start If your vehicle has this feature it may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start following for more detailed information 94 Lock Press the lock button to lock all the doors including the tailgate If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for additional information Pressing the lock button may arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 118 m Unlock Press the unlock button to unlock the driver s door If the button is pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors including the tailgate will unlock The interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 118 amp Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release this button to locate your vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three ti
314. m Warning Light 234 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 504 Care of Safety Belts eee 500 Chemical Paint Spotting cceee 506 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 502 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 496 Fabric Carpet siiicar aceite ends irate 498 Finish Care cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 502 Finish Damage ssssiisaaners sitini 505 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACES simorniisiiesuetn ridai 499 LEANE horreo 499 Sheet Metal Damage 505 Speaker Covers c ccceceeeeeesteeeeeeeeeees 500 WINGS E E A E 505 Underbody Maintenance see 506 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 507 Washing Your Vehicle seses 501 Appearance Care cont WeatherstripS cceeecccseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeees 501 Windshield and Wiper Blades 503 Wood Panels cess tietcastaxiessosaieseecssanieencsantese 500 Ashtray S erensia ana aaa 218 Audio System S ceceececeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 316 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 318 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 00 318 Chime Level Adjustment eeee 319 Fixed Mast Antenna eeeseeeeeeeneeees 318 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual wicccc aiecccsctenree ence aaveneenseneces 302 Radio with CD and DVD 270 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceeeeeeeeeeeeees
315. m h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode following Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue e and the weight on your vehicle s tires Tow Haul Mode Tow haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is pulling a large or heavy load or trailer Tow haul is most useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain in stop and go traffic or when you need improved low speed control such as when parking The purpose of the tow haul mode is to do the following e Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load e Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded e Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load 381 Tow haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the
316. materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with w
317. mber not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It does not include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR 377 Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension comes as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension See Road Sensing Suspension on page 329 This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned to LOCK You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a weight distributing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the height See Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches under Towing a Trailer on page 380 378 Truck Camper Loading Information Your vehicle was neither
318. me examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle LATCH BOTH LAP AND ae SHOULDER BELTS TO crate ENGINE ee Se PROTECT OCCUPANT Suton AD cootant ering Ge DO NOT TWIST SAFETY i TEMP BELT WHEN ATTACHING PROTECT 4 TURN FUSE EYES BY FASTEN SIGNALS BATTERY BOX SHIELDING SEAT AIRBAG X CHARGING ACCESS U I BELTS SYSTEM PARKING CAUSTIC LANDS ENGINE BATTERY MOVE SEAT e DO NOT INSTALL a COOLANT Abin GAOL FULLY a AREAR FACING a CHILD RESTRAINT FAN CAUSE REARWARD dau HAZARD SECURE IN THIS SEATING BURNS CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT AVOID PULL BELT SPARKS OR OUT FLAMES COMPLETELY ai THEN SECURE y IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT LAMPS PRESSURE SPARK OR POSITION FLAME M ANTI LOCK COULD rower MLT DOOR LOCK ae SERVICE gt EXPLODE MANUAL BATTERY winpow __ _ UNLOCK SYSTEM e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING DAYTIME CHILD RESTRAINT RUNNING ENGINE OL ara OWNER MANUAL Section 1 Front Seals pieier aa 8 Power S6als ice disis wedi daaviobta des tuvelvocsaauseseieeuarcans 8 Power Lumbar siciitveahieccsavinteiiednedaseindeuns 9 Heated Seats cccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 10 Heated and Cooled Seats 0 0 00 11 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals 12 Power Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeee 14 Head Restraints cceccceceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 15 Rear Seats pasean eikka anat 16 Rear Seat Operation cce
319. mediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you will notify us Please call us at 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 561 In Canada please call us at 1 888 446 2000 Or write Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases 562 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada the service bulletin reference
320. mes Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarm button is pressed again The ignition must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your GM dealer Remember to bring any additional transmitters so they can also be re coded to match the new transmitter Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your RKE transmitter should last about four years The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message in the vehicle s DIC will display if the RKE transmitter battery is low See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Mes
321. mission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Before checking the fluid level prepare your vehicle as follows 1 Start the engine and park your vehicle on a level surface Keep the engine running 2 Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK P 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move the shift lever back to PARK P 4 Allow the engine to idle 500 800 rpm for at least one minute Slowly release the brake pedal 415 5 Keep the engine running and press the Trip Fuel button until TRANS TEMP Transmission Temperature displays on the Driver Information Center DIC 6 Using the TRANS TEMP reading determine and perform the appropriate check procedure If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges allow the vehicle to cool or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 80 F and 90 F
322. mp B Stoplamp Turn Signal Taillamp C Back up Lamp D Sidemarker Lamp 1 Open the tailgate See Tailgate on page 114 for more information 2 Remove the two screws from the 3 Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to remove taillamp assembly Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly Pull the bulb straight out from the socket Press a new bulb into the socket insert it into the taillamp assembly and turn the bulb socket clockwise until it clicks Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the screws 451 License Plate Lamp 3 Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out To replace one of these bulbs do the following 4 install the new bulb t net Under ie rear pamper tarihe bulk 5 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb socket Replacement Bulbs Bulb Number Back up Lamp 7441 License Plate Lamp Sidemarker Lamp Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp 3057 For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of the connector 452 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To replace the wiper blade a
323. mps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and tailgate will be delayed When locking the doors and tailgate with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a door or the tailgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter a second time See Delayed Locking on page 102 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors 261 ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds
324. n is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty 400 Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty
325. n the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers e Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts 345 e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the A CAUTION smart way to find out e Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over the effects of erosion You could be seriously injured or killed a i When driving up hills always try to go Driving Uphill straight up Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps e Ease up on your speed as you approach the e Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the top of the hill steering wheel e Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more e Get a smooth start up the hill and try to visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills maintain your speed Do not use more power e Sound the horn as you approach the top of the than you need because you do not want hill to let opposing traffic know you are there the wheels to start spinning or sliding as e Use the headlamps even during the day They e Tr
326. n to the right one notch to go to the next chapter INFO Press the programmed INFO soft key or press the TUNE SEL knob and rotate until INFO is shown and then press the TUNE SEL knob Pressing INFO brings up the Information display It shows the current Title number Chapter number and elapsed time of the DVD and additional menu items e F1 SUB Press this pushbutton to view the Subtitle Language Menu e F2 ANGLE Press this pushbutton to view the Angle Menu e F6 BACK Press this pushbutton to return to the previous screen 294 Playing a DVD Audio Disc Not all DVD audio discs are recorded to industry standards and for this reason may not play properly in your vehicle F1 Play Pause Press this pushbutton to pause the DVD if it is playing Press Play F1 to restart the DVD if it is paused F2 Stop Press this pushbutton once to stop the DVD and retain your current position Press it again from the stopped state to return to the beginning of the disc F3 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton if the DVD player is playing to enter fast reverse mode Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode F4 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton if the DVD player is playing to enter fast forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play a
327. n your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 369 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 370
328. nal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on 197 Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it 7 Mist For a single wiping cycle turn the band to mist Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on mist longer 198 i Delay You can set the wiper speed
329. nance and Cleaning To ensure that the water management system performs properly be sure that the Midgate tailgate and cover system are fully closed and that all parts are clean and not blocked with debris Follow the instructions given next in this section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item G Cargo floor H Cargo mat central area of mat is intended to be dry Top Drain Grates Removal and Cleaning 2 Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from the vehicle Flush the drain with clean water The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on both sides of the vehicle Clean the grates and drains if there is a blockage To remove each drain grate do the following 1 Remove the cargo panels See Cargo Cover Panels on page 168 for more information 183 To replace the drain grate do the following 1 Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the grate 2 When you are sure that the clips are aligned with the slots push the grate down firmly The grate should clip into place Do not force the grate if it will not clip into place realign the clips with the holes and try again 184 Side Rail Channels The side rail channels are located on top of both sides of the cargo area You may want to flush them out with clean water if you notice any debris collecting inside of them When loading cargo into the cargo area be careful not to damage the rails Midgate
330. nd Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year 523 Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 407 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 410 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See footnote Oooo en o e Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j Oooo en o o Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator if equipped If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 412 See footnote k Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 467 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 530 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any need
331. nd confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key Proceed to the passenger s side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the passenger s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the driver s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver s side rear tire the horn chirp will sound two more times to signal the tire learning mode is no longer active Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label 12 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor If you replace one of the road tires with the spare the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on the DIC screen This message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference receiv
332. nd road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load 462 If your vehicle has P265 65R18 or P285 45R22 size tires and you will be driving at high speeds speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher set the cold inflation pressure to 3 psi 20 kPa above the recommended tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information Label When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels If your vehicle has this feature sensors are mounted on each tire and wheel assembly except the spare tire The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire pressure condition exists If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center DIC the driver may also check tire pressure levels using the DIC When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol located on the instrument panel c
333. nd collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs 558 If an Accident Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident e Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured e If there has been an injury call 911 for help Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer e Give only the necessary and reques
334. nd snap features to remove the air dam 1 Remove the two outboard air dam bolts 2 With a flat blade screwdriver push down on the snap features and disengage the snaps 3 After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged push forward on the air dam until it is free When you are back on roads though be sure to replace the air dam Notice Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off road driving To reinstall the lower air dam do the following 1 Line up the snap features and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps 2 Install the two outboard bolts 340 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving A CAUTION e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
335. ndows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior e Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area
336. nds No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text after 4 second delay data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Info Artist Name Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this channel available The system is working properly 300 Radio Display Message Action Required No Info Song Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this available channel The system is working properly No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel The system is working properly NotFound No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The system is working properly No Info No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly XM
337. needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield 527 e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer tailgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Inspect system Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replac
338. ner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 499 Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap 500 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to ri
339. ng Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Usage ___Fluid Lubricant j i Lubricants part numer or spetieaton maybe obtained rom A ower eerin ul GM PartNo U S 89021184 i GM Standard GM6094M and ee displays the American Petroleum Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Institute Certified for Gasoline Key Lock 7 Engines starburst symbol Ce GM Part No U S 12346241 in GM Goodwrench oil meets all the Canada 10953474 requirements for your vehicle To Chassis Lubricant a ee O ee Oil on page 407 j Lubrication meeting requirements of NLGI 2 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Category LB or GC LB water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 419 Engine Oil Engine Coolant 533 Usage Fluid Lubricant Usage Fluid Lubricant SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Front and Rear Lubricant Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 12346241 Axle GM Part No U S 12378261 Points in Canada 10953474 in Canada 10953455 meeting Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Specification 9986115 GM Part No U S 3634770 Manual Transmission Fluid Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Transfer Case GM Part No U S 88861800 Conditioning Silicone Grease in Canada 88861801 GM Part No U S 1
340. ng above the side windows 71 A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering And if your vehicle has roof mounted side impact airbags never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating side impact airbag will be blocked The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear The roof mounted rollover airbag for the right front passenger and the person directly behind that passenger is located in the ceiling above the side windows 72 When Should an Airbag Inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on ho
341. ng the Flat Tire and Installing Underbody Maintenance cec 506 the Spare Tire evan nc ect ceecctdeeitddaleimttcce s 482 Chemical Paint Spotting se ee 506 Secondary Latch System n 489 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 507 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 492 Spare TIlE resessie dna 495 394 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Vehicle Identification c eee 508 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 0008 509 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 508 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 00 510 Service Parts Identification Label 508 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 512 Electrical System ccccceeseeeeenees 509 Underhood Fuse Block ceeeeeee 513 Add On Electrical Equipment 008 509 Capacities and Specifications 518 Windshield Wiper Fuses secc 509 Power Windows and Other Power ODPUONS oerien nnii reed ies 509 395 Service We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants marks you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and ACDelco supported service people E parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories 396 Accessories and Modifications When you add non GM accessories to
342. ngers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts 32 Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap shoulder belts Here is how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until Make sure the release button on the buckle is it clicks positioned so you would be able to unbuckle Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is the safety belt quickly if you ever had to secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 38 3 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder part 33 7 A A A i Hi gt Ns AES SEE g SS 2 a OY 7 AK Lp Wi SS i wy K The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on t
343. nly cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If you suspect a small leak then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a large leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealership service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance Schedule See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the trans
344. nse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 507 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle 501 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 501 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 507 If your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish 502 Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle Foreign
345. nsole The front cupholder may be removed for cleaning by pushing down and then back on the cupholder Instrument Panel Storage Area Your vehicle may have a closed storage area on the instrument panel above the compact disc changer You can open the storage area by pressing in the bottom of the lid and the lid will automatically raise up Press down on the lid to close the storage area 166 Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle has a console compartment between the bucket seats The console has both an upper and lower storage bin that can be opened by lifting up on the latches located at the front of the console lids The console may have an accessory power outlet inside see Accessory Power Outlet s on page 217 The rear of the console also has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use Luggage Carrier The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be used to load things on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof It may also have crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum
346. ntrols Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel Your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls they may differ depending on your vehicle s options The audio steering wheel controls include the following V A Next Previous Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite When a CD DVD is playing press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or previous track or chapter 316 Mute Voice Recognition Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only The audio of the wireless and wired headphones if your vehicle has these features will not be muted Press and release this button again to turn the sound on If your vehicle has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information Press and hold this button for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar system If your vehicle also has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition and say OnStar to enter OnStar mode See the OnStar System on page 152 in this manual for more information SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and
347. ntrols on page 316 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 Pedal Adjust Button See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 128 Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button If Equipped See Windshield Washer on page 200 Power Running Boards Disable Button If Equipped See Power Running Boards on page 114 Dual Automatic Climate Controls See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 219 Heated Seats If Equipped See Heated Seats on page 10 Heated and Cooled Seats If Equipped See Heated and Cooled Seats on page 11 StabiliTrak Disable Button See StabiliTrak System on page 330 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Disable Button See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 213 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 165 193 Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flashers warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column The hazard warning flashers work no matter what ignition position the key is in and even if the key is not in the ignition Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals will not work 194 Other Warning Devices If you carr
348. nu 2 Turn the tune sel knob until SETUP appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to enter into SETUP Turn the tune sel knob until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to enter into CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS Turn the tune sel knob to select which of the four configurable keys you would like to change The currently assigned feature will be shown Press the tune sel knob to select the configurable key to change 8 Turn the tune sel knob to find the feature that you would like to store to the key 9 Press the tune sel knob when you have found the feature to be stored The display will update by showing the symbol of the feature that you selected next to the configurable key 10 Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key Once a feature is programmed to a key the feature will not appear on the display when programming the remaining configurable keys The configurable keys can be changed at any time 299 XM Radio Messages Radio Display Message Action Required XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seco
349. nufacturer s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 62 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passenger s airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger s seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger s airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 81 If a person of ad
350. number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal 117 Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle has a content theft deterrent alarm system This is the security light To activate the theft deterrent system do the following 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The security light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off The content theft deterrent system does not sense if the midgate is open or ajar therefore vehicle contents may not be protected if the midgate is left open or ajar 118 If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a ten second pre alarm will occur The horn will chirp and the lights will flash If the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre alarm the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power You can choose different feedback options for the alarm See Driver Information Center DIC on page 243 Driver Information Center DIC Remember the theft deterrent system will not activate if you lock the doors with a key the manual door lock or the power door lock switch It activates only i
351. o and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 339 Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you can carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle Reme
352. o Steering Wheel Controls 316 Radio Reception cccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeees 317 Care of Your CDs and DVDs nsss 318 Care of the CD and DVD Player 318 Fixed Mast Antenna cecene 318 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 319 Chime Level Adjustment 0 ceeeeeee 319 NOTES 191 Instrument Panel Overview The main components of your instrument panel are the following A B Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 224 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 196 Hazard Warning Flasher Button See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 194 Instrument Panel Cluster See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 226 Shift Lever Tow Haul Selector Button See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 129 and Tow Haul Mode on page 135 Analog Clock See Analog Clock on page 218 Audio System See Audio System s on page 267 Navigation Radio System if equipped See Navigation Radio System on page 302 Exterior Lamps Control See Exterior Lamps on page 204 Dome Override Button See Dome Lamp Override on page 212 Cruise Control Buttons See Cruise Control on page 201 Tilt Lever See Tilt Wheel on page 195 Horn See Horn on page 194 Audio Steering Wheel Buttons See Audio Steering Wheel Co
353. o lock the panel in place You should hear a click when each latch locks correctly 179 2 Fold the four primary strap ends towards the 4 Take the secondary strap and wrap it around center as shown the package Finally attach the hooks to the webbing and place inside the top box A storage compartment 3 Take the short strap and surround the folded webbing forming a package Cargo Tie Downs All Weather Cargo Area Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different configurations cargo panels on or off Midgate up or down rear glass in or out The vehicle has features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo inside the cargo area Your vehicle is designed to quickly direct water out of the cargo box The top drain grates side rail channels catch cups Midgate drain cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo mat help do this There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that you can use to strap cargo in 181 Even when all of these things are working properly and the cover system is on there may be some instances heavy rains automated car washes etc when water may be present in the following areas C Side rail channels and catch cups D Front drains A Top drain grates B Removable front drain grate Midgate drain grate 182 E Water drainage area around both sides of the cargo box and tailgate side F Rear drains Mainte
354. o raise the height of the lumbar support press and hold the top of the control e To lower the height of the lumbar support press and hold the bottom of the control Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 for more information Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats If the front seats have the heated seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the climate control panel Heated Seatback To heat only the seatback press the top button with the heated seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seatback off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low 10 s Heated Seat and Seatback To heat the entire seat press the bottom button with the heated seat and seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of
355. oading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 454 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be tr
356. oes not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 2 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 2 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors Tighten the top tether Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 59 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 51 If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 51 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint
357. ol System on page 219 for more information Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger s side mirror may have convex glass A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver s seat Your vehicle has a turn signal indicator on the mirror An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change 151 OnStar System e OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency where we can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors If you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside Service for you 152 A complete OnStar Owner s Guide and the Terms and Conditions of the OnStar Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle s OnStar Subscriber Information packet located in your vehicle For more information visit www onstar com or www on
358. olant condition can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day e Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 380 424 If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If you have an air conditioner and it is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle immediately If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while you are parked If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan idle the engine f
359. oline Octane on page 399 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not rea
360. on Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for more information on location A CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight and fully seated 421 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for more information on location 422 Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle
361. on of air brakes on a very large truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with URPA performance e When URPA is disabled without driver action and the driver attempts to turn URPA back on by pressing the rear park aid button the indicator light will flash for 3 seconds and then stay lit to indicate that URPA is off If the vehicle bumper is damaged the URPA system may not work properly Take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system 216 Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio One outlet is located in the center console Lift up on the lower latch located at the front of the console lid to access the outlet There may also be an accessory power outlet located on the back of the center console above the cupholder To use an outlet lift up on the spring loaded protective cap When not in use the cap will automatically close over the outlet The accessory power outlet is powered at all times Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the accessory outlets Notice If electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet the battery may drain causing your vehicle not to start or damage to the battery This would not be covered by the warranty Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off your vehicle Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power o
362. on the radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more information on configuring the keys 269 Setting the Date Radio with CD and DVD 1 Press the tune select knob the right knob to enter the main menu 2 21 JAN 2004 12 10 P 2 Turn the tune select knob until SET DATE mM 103 5 appears on the display EA oS pEE SG Sat 3 Press the tune select knob to select SET DATE 4 Turn the tune select knob to adjust the date 5 Press the tune select knob to update the time VEHICLE DATE UPDATED will appear on the display If the DATE is programmed into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch cy Power Press this knob to turn the radio QO QO oa Playing the Radio the display back to the date set function The time on and off and date will always appear on the radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Press and hold this knob for more than Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more two seconds to turn off the radio RSE information on configuring the keys rear seat entertainment video screen and RSA rear seat audio lt 1 Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume 270 SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio CD DVD or auxiliary if your vehicle has this feature The CD or DVD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD or DVD will appea
363. on the rear seat audio system if your vehicle has this feature 306 The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if your vehicle has this feature The DVD player may be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 313 for more information When a device is connected to the radio s auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature or A V jacks the rear seat passengers will be able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers will be able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen The video screen is located in the RSE overhead console To use the video screen do the following 1 Push the release button located on the RSE overhead console 2 Rotate the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen will remain on this is normal and the DVD will continue to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the s
364. once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 555 e Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service 77 Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger airbag status indicator on the overhead console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to RUN or START The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 230 78 Arve P be PASSENGER AIRBAG 4 we 2 OFF ON United States Canada The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system
365. one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver o
366. ontrolled by the buttons on the radio the rear seat audio system and the remote control if your vehicle has this feature See the Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information A DVD icon will display whenever a disc is loaded The DVD player can also be run for passengers in the rear seat with the radio off The rear seat passenger can power on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the disc See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information 291 amp Eject Press this button to eject the DVD or CD Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off If the disc is not removed after a short time the disc will be pulled back into the DVD player for storage The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code The region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs DVD video DVD audio DVD R RW and DVD R RW are fully supported by this DVD player In addition standard audio CDs CD R CD RW video CD SACD MP3 and WMA formatted discs are fully supported If a disc is inserted that is not supported an error message will display and the disc will be ejected When a DVD is inserted the DVD functions will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations These functions vary based on the type of disc that is inserted Loading the disc can take some time as the DVD player reads the disc and determines the type 292
367. or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead 343 e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking 344 In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a
368. or five minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 407 425 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is A CAUTION what you will see An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ENA KL PEN NA If the coolant inside the
369. or pedal Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If your traction control system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Anti Lock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Many of the same design features that help make your vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather condit
370. otation on page 467 530 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 136 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to RUN but do not start the engine Without applying Control System Check a the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the Z CAUTION shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service When you are doing this inspection the Ignition Transmission Lock Check vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle While parked and with the parking brake set try moves you or others could be injured to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK only when 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked the shift lever is in PARK P on a l
371. our vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior 496 When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before u
372. ow oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 407 for more information If low oil pressure levels occur this message will display Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer See Engine Oil on page 407 252 PARKING ASSIST OFF After the vehicle has been started this message will display to remind the driver that the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system has been turned off Press the set reset button to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 213 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN If the passenger s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message will display while you are matching a remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 and DIC Operation and
373. own will prevent damage due to overheating 2 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try When starting your engine in very cold weather below O F or 18 C do this 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds When the engine starts let go of the key 2 If your engine still will not start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Notice Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty 127 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal Your vehicle has an adj
374. pay the full cost 560 If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should im
375. person sitting there Always be sure to press the rear of the seat cushion down This action locks the seatback in place Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Raise the head restraint 17 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your passengers to buckle your safety belts See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 228 and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 228 In most states and in all Can
376. placing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 87 38 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts Older Children A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the
377. pped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player will begin to play from the beginning of the DVD 311 Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes lost the remote and or the headphones The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound 312 Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones See your dealer for assistance Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio you have The video screen may display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message is displayed when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message will be displayed if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message will be displayed if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message will be displayed if no disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed on the ra
378. pplying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If you turn off traction control only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly 332 Notice If you allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message are displayed you could damage the transfer case The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and this message are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration or may hear a noise or vibration This is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and the cruise control will automatically disengage When roa
379. r passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink 325 Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 330 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 397 326 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 232 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about
380. r Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 473 456 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A t
381. r braking or even none going down a e As you go over the top of a hill be alert hill You could crash Always have your There could be something in your lane like a engine running and your vehicle in gear stalled car or an accident when you go downhill e You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples e Know how to go down hills The most are long grades passing or no passing zones important thing to know is this let your engine a falling rocks area or winding roads Be do some of the slowing down Shift to a alert to these and take appropriate action lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill 365 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 454 366 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between th
382. r fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system The indicator light will flash This activation will initiate four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed This is a normal condition Cruise Control A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes cruise control is turned off If your vehi
383. r in the VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label you will find the following e VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain your vehicle s battery even if your vehicle is not operating Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 84 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories If
384. r is displayed Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVERAGE ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVERAGE ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used inform
385. r method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the vehicle the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 509 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key IIl decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have keys made and programmed to the system 121 See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new additional key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert
386. r on page 200 For information on the exterior lamps see Exterior Lamps on page 204 Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically To signal a lane change raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash This will cause the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if the tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever will return by itself when it is released An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse See nstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 510 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 513 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn sig
387. r on the display if a disc is loaded If a CD or DVD is not loaded the display will change to the auxiliary source if your vehicle has this feature or stay on the radio Vehicle Noise Compensation VNC Your vehicle has a Bose audio system It includes Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology When turned on AudioPilot continuously adjusts the audio system equalization to compensate for background noise so that your music always sounds the same at the set volume level This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well you hear the music being played through your vehicle s audio system At higher volume settings where the music is much louder than the background noise there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot To use AudioPilot set the radio volume at a low to moderate listening level Begin listening while the vehicle is stopped with the motor running Turn the AudioPilot on by pressing the tune sel select knob to enter the main menu Then turn the tune sel knob until VNC AUDIOPILOT appears on the display Press the tune sel knob to turn AudioPilot on and off An X will appear in the box when it is turned on Then resume driving gradually increasing the vehicle speed You will notice that your music sounds the same regardless of background noises such as road noise tire hum or wind With the AudioPilot turned off repeat this process ag
388. r than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With ABS you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Locking Differential If your vehicle has this feature your locking differential can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle Road Sensing Suspension The Road Sensing Suspension RSS feature provides superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading
389. r vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 477 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 475 Tire Chains A CAUTION Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly re adjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin you
390. r wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires 476 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changin
391. ram another device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 6 choosing a different function button in Step 4 than what you used for the garage door opener Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the Universal Home Remote device do the following 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all button will be erased For additional information on Universal Home Remote see Customer Assistance Offices on page 546 161 Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there is one triangular LED above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below If your vehicle has three round LED above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the ins
392. rasing your Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage If you do not know if your garage door opener is a fixed code or rolling code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover Your garage door opener is a fixed code device if a panel of DIP switches is present If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device 157 Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code Fixed Code garage door openers are used for garage doors produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time which is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Remove the battery cover of the hand held transmitter 158 Switch Number 1 2 3 41 56 7 8 Switch Position On On Off On Off On Off Off Example of Switch Settings 2 Write down the eight to 12 coding switch settings from left to right When the switch is in the up position write on and when a switch is in the down position write off If a switch is set between the up and down position write middle 3 Input these positions into the Universal Home
393. re is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 235 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 425 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 422 for more information If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation this message will display and a chime will sound Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message will clear when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message will display and a chime will sound when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 422 for further information This message will also display when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this m
394. red by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle 419 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 420 Notice If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice If you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 for more informati
395. ressure Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition to RUN This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message in the Driver Information Center DIC will accompany the light see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 248 Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 454 for more information 236 This light will flash for approximately 60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 462 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle has a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice f you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awh
396. rface Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx socket Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line The lamp on the left A shows the correct headlamp aim The lamp on the right B shows the incorrect headlamp aim Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp 449 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 452 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting A CAUTION The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage If you try to service any of the system components you could be seriously injured Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them Your vehicle has HID headlamps After your vehicle s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal 450 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps To replace one of these bulbs do the following A Stoplamp Turn Signal Tailla
397. ring a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt retractor assembly Be sure to do so Then the new retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt retractor assemblies even if the frontal airbags have not deployed The driver and front passenger s safety belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 229 87 4 NOTES 88 Features and Controls Section 2 Keys ceren x cede os dame cu ase ceeenket eee 91 Remote Keyless Entry System 00 92 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 93 Doors and LOCKS occse 101 Door LOCKS rrokin ap saneteetadines 101 Power
398. rnia Proposition 65 Warning 397 Canadian OWNS ceceeeeeeeeeentteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 Capacities and Specifications 0 518 Carbon Monoxide 104 114 141 366 380 Care of Safety Belts soimaan aas 500 Your CD and DVD Player a i 318 Your CDs and DVDS cc 318 Cargo Area All Weather cc cceseeeeeeees 181 Cargo Cover Panels aeee 168 Center Console Storage Area ceecee 166 Chains Tire ccccccccecccecceeecueeeeeeeaeetaeeeeeeees 476 Charging System Light irisada 232 Check Engine Light serseri nnana 236 Checking Things Under the Hood 404 Chemical Paint Spotting ceee 506 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ceeeeeeeeeeees 45 Infants and Young Children 2 0 42 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 51 Older CHIEN ssiidecteeserccnahnnteeor teats 39 Child Restraints cont Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat POSHON sestara ien inns 60 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position sssrssenaikiad oniinn 62 Where to Put the Restraint e 50 Chime Level Adjustment 0 ceeereee 319 Cigarette Lighter ccccceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 218 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 504 Exterior Lamps Lenses cceeeeeeeeeees 502 FabniC Carpet csvcssiersaseces csssevecsianeberecsiaede 498 Finish Care vii vcscieteiestereeis indedesiieiee deiee
399. rns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are s
400. rouble On a wet road you cannot stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause accidents They may not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to slow down before you hit them
401. rsal Home Remote is now in the training learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section Individual buttons cannot be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button following this section Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the Universal Home Remote button proceed with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section For additional information on Universal Home Remote see Customer Assistance Offices on page 546 Storage Areas Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle upward 165 Cupholder s Your vehicle has cupholders for the front and rear passengers The cupholders are located in the center console for the front passengers and on the rear of the center console for the rear passengers To use the front cupholders press down on the access door and release The door will then open Push the door back down to close it To use the rear cupholders pull down on the door located on the back of the co
402. rve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control 333 Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See StabiliTrak System on page 330 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 334 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 397 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a
403. s How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Press the cancel button on the steering wheel e Press the On Off button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition the cruise control set speed memory is erased 204 Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions Off Turn the control to this position to turn off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into the PARK P position AUT
404. s a safety feature To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts 126 Your vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects the electrical system If the ignition key is turned to the START and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking until the vehicle starts or until it exceeds the maximum cranking time allowed approximately 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running The engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or LOCK Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Waiting about 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool d
405. s and Indicators 225 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 0008 248 Hazard Warning Flashers aae 194 Other Warning Devices 06 ee 194 Safety and Symbols ceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 Vehicle Damage ccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 0 474 Different Size oo eee eea 472 Replacement s cecceeeeeeseeneeeeeseneees 474 Where to Put the Restraint eee 50 WINGKOWS erccsecudecticconssatceusdenteuedeanetaaiceenii lentes 115 POWO serna a a 116 580 Windshield Rainsense Wipers ocssscsescrenre 199 WASNGT tseesecncuiaeneannaleveenstuadetnenlanbeonetleannaes 200 Washer Fud seiccnenuninorseiniana 432 Wiper Blade Replacement asserere 453 Wiper Blades Cleaning ccccceceeee 503 Wiper FUSES ssssssssisenerrrrssrrrrsrrrnreserrrenns 509 WIPES cceessvetteconteeusctaneccedtssvendseasietieeedseenes 198 Winter Driving ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 366 X XM Radio Messages esesirrrenerrreserrrn 300 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 319 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment 520
406. s before to keep it 1 Turn off the engine away from moving engine parts If you do 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical not it could be damaged aa Ma cord is located on the driver s How long should you keep the coolant heater A e of the Aa AA n ngal plugged in The answer depends on the outside G Powe Brenna EUI TESEI temperature the kind of oil you have and 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded some other things Instead of trying to list 110 volt AC outlet everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best A CAUTION advice for that particular area Plugging the cord into an ungrounded Automatic Transmission Operation outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord Your vehicle has a Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic transmission and has an electronic shift could overheat and cause a fire You position indicator within the instrument panel could be seriously injured Plug the cord cluster The electronic shift position indicator into a properly grounded three prong displays when the shift lever is moved out of 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not PARK P reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 129 There are several different positions for the shift lever PARK P This position locks your rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start your
407. s described Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If fluid is added it may take 15 minutes or longer to obtain an accurate reading because of residual fluid draining down the dipstick tube If inconsistent readings persist check the transmission breather to be sure it is clean and not clogged If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 422 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be cove
408. s greater than 9 Press this button before entering the number Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries do the following 1 Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control 2 Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Close the battery door securely If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Recommended Action No power The ignition might not be turned on or in accessory The picture does not Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out Recommended Action In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player will resume playing where the DVD was sto
409. s not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 441 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 442 Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle
410. s returned to the neutral position If IntellliBeam was using low beams prior to this action the IntellliBeam feature will be temporarily disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral position The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting except AUTO When this occurs IntellliBeam will be disabled until the control is turned back to the AUTO position The IntellliBeam system is turned off at the inside rearview mirror IntellliBeam may not turn off the high beams if the system cannot detect other vehicle s lamps because of any of the following The others vehicle s lamp s are missing damaged obstructed from view or otherwise undetected The other vehicle s lamp s are covered with dirt snow and or road spray The other vehicle s lamp s cannot be detected due to dense exhaust smoke fog snow road spray mist or other airborne obstructions Your vehicle s windshield is dirty cracked or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the IntellliBeam light sensor Your vehicle s windshield is covered with ice dirt haze or other obstructions Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the vehicle points upward causing the IntellliBeam sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps You are driving on winding or hilly roads You may need to manually disable or cancel the high beam headlamps by turning the low beam headlamps on if any of the above condi
411. s the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 335 Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time 336 Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not
412. s the procedure described previously but when you lower the Midgate with the rear glass in the stored position you will notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the Midgate This is completely normal however since the crossbar lowers with the Midgate it will be heavier As you lower the Midgate be ready for the extra weight and do not let the Midgate fall as you lower it Raising the Midgate To return the Midgate to its normal position raise the Midgate up with a firm swinging motion until it latches into place securely This will help to ensure that the Midgate closes with enough force to engage the latches If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put it back do so using the instructions given previously 113 Tailgate Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you To shut the tailgate push it firmly upward until it latches Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is latched securely Tailgate Removal The tailgate is not to be removed This may cause damage to electrical connector resulting in loss of lock unlock and rear vision camera function 114 Power Running Boards Your vehicle may have power running boards The power running boards automatically extend from beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has been
413. s washer fluid e Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master DOT 3 cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for the location of the reservoir AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all 433 So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle co
414. sage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack is for the video input The white jack is for the left audio input The red jack is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX button on the remote control will switch the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio will play the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio with CD and DVD on page 270 for more information 305 How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature perform the following 1 Press the display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control menu navigation arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the display menu button again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks
415. sages on page 248 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter 95 To replace the battery in this type of RKE transmitter do the following 1 96 Use a flat object with a thin edge into the notch located above the metal base and separate the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter Remove the old battery but do not use a metal object to do this Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the positive side of the battery facing up Use a type CR2032 battery or equivalent type Make sure the cover is on tightly so water will not get in Snap the front and the back of the transmitter together Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle To replace the battery in this type of RKE transmitter do the following 1 Use a flat object with a thin edge into the notch located below the vehicle locator panic alarm button and separate the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter Remove the old battery but do not use a metal object to do this Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the positive side of the battery facing down Use a type CR2032 battery or equivalent type Snap the front and the back of the transmit
416. section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C
417. selected three for high two for medium and one for low s Heated Seat and Seatback To heat the entire seat press the button with the heated seat and seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the ignition is turned off If you want to use the heated and cooled seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the appropriate seat button again 11 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals Your vehicle has the memory package The controls for this feature are located on the driver s door and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat outside mirrors and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature if your vehicle has it oO To save your positions in memory do the following 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 149 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 128 for more information Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall the mirror
418. set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the temperature inside the vehicle The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing Passenger s Side Temperature Knob The passenger s side knob can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passengers side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section 219 Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the temperature inside the vehicle The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing Set the passenger s temperature setting to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing the passenger power knob Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display will change to show the current temperature s and AUTO will appear The current delivery mode and fan speed will also be displayed for approximately five seconds 220 Wh
419. sing cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques e Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface e Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces e Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc 497 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt
420. small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving on page 323 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill e ls there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction o
421. ssembly do the following k aiae kee a A Connector away 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector f and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 535 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and rotate the blade assembly away from the arm connector 453 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet included with your vehicle A CAUTION e Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 CAUTION Continued 454 CAUTION Continued e Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure
422. st But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 397 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has the Anti Lock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away ABS will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 234 Along with ABS your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer for service 327 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels 328 ABS can change the brake pressure faste
423. star ca contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week OnStar Services For new vehicles equipped with OnStar the Directions amp Connections Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year to meet your needs For more information press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Directions amp Connections Plan Advanced Automatic Crash Notification Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance AccidentAssist Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Virtual Advisor Driving Directions RideAssist Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands at the touch of a button Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and may be used with Pre Paid Minute Packages or linked to a cell phone through OnStar Shared Minutes Plan To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Virtual Advisor Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor It is a
424. started Then tighten the nut caps with the wheel wrench until they are snug Do not overtighten the nut caps or they may break e f you are reinstalling plastic nut caps tighten the nuts by hand to get them started Then tighten the nut caps with the wheel wrench until they are snug Do not overtighten the nut caps or they may break e If you are reinstalling the smooth center cap To release the spare tire from the secondary latch place it on the wheel and tap it into place do the following until it seats flush with the wheel 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the Secondary Latch System cable end is Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist visible he gable is not visible assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 492 Z CAUTION 2 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns proceed to Step 6 Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read an
425. steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread 457 Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 460 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 458 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some
426. stomization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it 266 DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED This feature allows you to enable or disable the digital speedometer on the DIC Press the customization button until DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The digital speedometer will be disabled ON default The digital speedometer will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to
427. system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is failsafe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 78 for more on this including important safety information If after several seconds all status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service A CAUTION If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come on together it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 229 231 Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition to the START position as a check to show you it is working The light should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or
428. t 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes 390 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness e White Ground Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red w Black Stripe Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake
429. t e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking e The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol 323 According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka 324 It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in
430. t SIXTH 6 cannot be used until the plus minus button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear 134 The transmission will prevent a gear range until a speed that is appropriate for current driving conditions is achieved If shifting is prevented for any reason the current selected gear will flash multiple times in the DIC Grade Braking is not available when the Driver Shift Control is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 135 for more information While using the DSC cruise control and the tow haul mode can be used Tow Haul Mode Your vehicle has a tow haul mode The tow haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling providing increased performance vehicle control and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to turn the tow haul on or off When the tow haul is on a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 242 for more information Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 380 for more information The tow haul mode works with the Autoride feature if the vehicle has this to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle See Autoride on page 379 135 Grade Braking Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade It maintains the vehicle s speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses
431. t came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 51 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle 48 When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps th
432. t four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL and RPT TRCK e Normal Sets the system for normal play of the DVD e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play and advance to the next mode F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to display DVD PLAY MODE K ort Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the start of the current track Press it again to go to the previous track or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track Press and hold these buttons to change tracks at a rate of one per second TUNE SEL knob Turn to the left one notch to go to the start of the current track Turn it again to go to the previous track or turn to the right one notch to go to the next track If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment you can view the menu and playlist from your DVD audio disc on the video screen Turn on the video screen with the power button on the remote control to view and navigate the menu and playlists See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information Playing a CD in the DVD Drive F3 Reverse Press and hold this
433. t passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right 337 Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin 338 A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerat
434. t to determine how much your vehicle can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Notice Using a fifth wheel or goose neck hitch device on your vehicle could damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use a fifth wheel or goose neck hitch device on your vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR AWD 6 2L 7 600 Ibs 3 447 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 383 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can to
435. t would not be covered by warranty Your vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle You may need to use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving 371 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 372 Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and L
436. tched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 318 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD 288 Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section F3 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast reverse mode Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse at 10 times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 20 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode The radio will be muted during the reverse mode A quick press of this pushbutton will go to the beginning of the previous folder F4 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play at 10 times the normal speed After holding it for more than four s
437. te number is KOBGTEO5A This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A GTEOSA Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System With One Triangular LED The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held radio frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate number is CB2SAHL3 155 This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device The Canadian Registration ID number is 2791021849A
438. tection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock 103 Midgate A CAUTION CAUTION Continued connections must pass through the seal between the body and the Midgate e Make sure all windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed on the setting that brings in outside air This will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 219 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 141 It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area covered and the tailgate and the Midgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can not see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the cargo covers on and the tailgate and Midgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable CAUTION Continued Midgate Operation Your vehicle is equipped with a Midgate and a removable rear glass panel The Midgate allows you to extend the length of your vehicle s cargo area 104 The following are the main components of the Rear Glass Removal and Storage Midgate system A CAUTION If
439. ted information to police and other parties involved in the accident Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the accident This will help guard against post accident legal action e If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 548 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the accident They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true
440. tem nied ape 154 All Wheel Drive u cccccecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 443 Storage Areas o eeeccceceeccccccceeececeseeeeees 165 Rear Axle scsescuncevereweccensunncosshentdeeassnceeas 444 SURTOON sssrin ksnara ked R 187 Front ARIS ca sccidicdatudtersesiersnceiniavindvivenear 446 Headlamp AiMing ou se keeecceeeeeecceeeeeeeees 447 Bulb Replacement o ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 450 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ou cc cccscccccessseeeseneeees 453 TeS sevice cecidichvwcsauenecenetasvanenaiendsesmatanedeen 454 Appearance Care o eeeeececcseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 496 Vehicle Identification oo eeeeeeeeee eee 508 Electrical System oe ccceeeeecececeeeeeeeeeees 509 Capacities and Specifications 518 Maintenance Schedule ee Maintenance Schedule Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CADILLAC the CADILLAC Crest amp Wreath and the names ESCALADE and EXT are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual Litho in U S A Part No 15854798 A First Printing This manual describes features that may be available in this model but your vehicl
441. ter together Make sure the cover is on tightly so water will not get in Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle 97 Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the RUN position If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system during remote start the climate control system will default to a heating mode during colder outside temperatures and a cooling mode during warmer outside temperatures If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start the climate control system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off If your vehicle has heated seats they will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to RUN 98 Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The RKE transmitter with the remote start button
442. terials available from your GM dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer s body and paint shop 505 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you 506 Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Polishing Cloth Wax Treated Tar and Road Oil Remover Chrome Cleaner and Polish White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Vinyl Cleaner Glass Clean
443. th plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including OPEW 40 La RESERVOIR drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant the coolant 4 mom surge tank pressure Us ouye cap and upper Notice In cold weather water can freeze and radiator hose is no crack the engine radiator heater core and longer hot other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap by slowly turning the pressure cap counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 429 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch mixture to the FULL COLD mark out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 430 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is h
444. th negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put the automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Notice lf you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on that vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You s
445. the Hood 404 Hood Release enrsssnicrisaiainsnisseaaa 405 Engine Compartment Overview s e 406 Engine Qil sassisk oeren 407 Engine Oil Life System ees 410 Engine Air Cleaner Filter eeees 412 Automatic Transmission Fluid 0 415 Engine Coolant cccceeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeees 419 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 422 Engine Overheating eccceceeseeeeeeeeeeees 422 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 425 Cooling System c ccceeeeeeettteteeeeeeeeeees 426 Engine Fan Noise esre 431 Power Steering Fluid ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 431 Windshield Washer Fluid aa 432 Brake S aor itene AA eE AT EUAS 433 BANGI sicicisnsieidvesitiieieeieiiiteliceesaieinbiens 437 JUMP Starting ieena 438 All Wheel Drive c 443 Pear Al secmorcnnnnsnoe s 444 Front AXE anana 446 Headlamp Aiming 0 eceeeeeeeeeees 447 Bulb Replacement 0 450 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 450 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 450 License Plate Lamp eccesseeeeeeteeeees 452 Replacement Bulbs ceeeeeseeeeeeeteeeees 452 393 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 453 Appearance Care cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 496 TAS e de etn hateriesees tense 454 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 496 Tire Sid
446. the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor right or left on the menu PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function Enter Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate If the radio is removed from your vehicle the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle With THEFTLOCK activated the radio will not operate if stolen 315 Audio Steering Wheel Co
447. the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases control of the vehicle The system constantly monitors the vehicle s speed acceleration throttle position and whether the brake pedal is being pressed and determines when to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down The system will then automatically command downshifts that reduces the vehicles speed until the brake pedal is no longer being pressed This indicates the desired vehicle speed has been reached 136 The tow haul mode and grade braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control stalk While in the DSC mode grade braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a gear See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 129 for more information Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph 5 km h for at least three seconds To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal with the parking brake symbol to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will
448. the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the RUN position within five seconds of removing the original key 122 5 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are driving and the security light comes on and stays on you may be able to restart your engine Your PASS Key Ill system however may not be working properly and must be serviced by your dealer If you lose or damage your PASS Key Ill key see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key IIl to have a new key made Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throitle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle e Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premat
449. the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of the rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain does not toss things around You will find other important information in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 and Tires on page 454 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment e Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations 341 Avo
450. the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 378 we Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light This light may also come on due to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 433 for more information United States Canada is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident This light should come on briefly when you turn If the light is still on after you have pulled the ignition key to RUN If it does not come off the road and stopped carefully have on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn the vehicle towed for service you if there is a problem 233 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the Anti Lock Brake System ABS this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That is normal If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 234 If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving your vehicle needs service You will also hear a chime sound when the light is on steady If the regular brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have ABS If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have ABS and there is a problem with your regular brakes In addition to both lights you will also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the vehicle
451. their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS v TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is no longer in RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made Audio Systems Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience See Defensive Driving on page 322 By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle s audio system you can use it with less effort as well as take advantage of its features While your vehicle is parked set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stat
452. these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this manual you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are so
453. three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your vehicle s engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump the brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If the engine stops you will still have some power brake assi
454. till working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode earlier When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant at or near sea level will boil at a lower temperature than at higher altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating on page 422 389 Parking on Hills A CAUTION You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do i
455. tilting and rolling over Driving across an incline that is too steep Also driving across an incline puts more weight will make your vehicle roll over You could on the downhill wheels This could cause a be seriously injured or killed If you have downhill slide or a rollover any doubt about the steepness of the e Surface conditions can be a problem when you incline do not drive across it Find drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots another route instead or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over 351 Q What if am driving across an incline that is not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take i
456. tions exist 207 Disabling and Resetting IntellliBeam at the Rearview Mirror IntellliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on the inside rearview mirror AUTO 2D On Off To disable the system press this button on the inside rearview mirror The IntellliBeam indicator will turn off and will not come back on until the IntellliBeam button is pressed again Stalk Disable When IntellliBeam has turned on the high beams pull or push the high beam stalk This will disable IntellliBeam The IntellliBeam indicator on the mirror will turn off To re enable IntellliBeam press the IntellliBeam button on the mirror A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer diagnostics This is done by pushing and holding this button for 20 seconds until the IntellliBeam indicator light flashes three times If you accidentally activate this the vehicle s setting will automatically be reset each time the ignition is turned off and then on again 208 Cleaning the IntellliBeam Light Sensor The light sensor is located on the inside of the vehicle in front of the inside rearview mirror Clean the light sensor window periodically using glass cleaner on a soft cloth Gently wipe the sensor window Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the sensor window Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually t
457. tly reduced and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you may notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 in Canada Some gasolines may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbony MMT General Motors recommends against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 400 for additional information 399 California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 236 If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the conditio
458. to block or damage the CHMSL unit 167 Rear Seat Armrest Your vehicle s second row seat may have an armrest storage compartment Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower the armrest To open the compartment push the button on the front of the armrest and pull the top open Cargo Cover Panels A CAUTION Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove a panel always store it in the proper storage location When you put it back always be sure that is securely reattached 168 Notice Exceeding the weight limit of 250 Ibs 113 kg can damage the cargo covers and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not put anything on top of the cargo covers over the weight limit Your vehicle has a three piece cargo cover system The cargo panels can be removed and stored in the cargo area of the vehicle To remove a cargo panel s do the following These numbers on the top and bottom of the 1 Lower the tailgate See Tailgate on page 114 for more information on the tailgate panels will be used as reference in the steps for removing storing and reinstalling the panels Before removing the cargo panel s notice 2 Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and the numbers embossed on the upper center right cargo panel latches located on the portion of each panel The panels are bottom
459. ton until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it AUTO HIGH BEAMS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select to have the Intellibeam system turned off or on See Exterior Lamps on page 204 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH BEAMS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default The Intellibeam system will be turned off ON The Intellibeam system will be turned on NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting
460. top scanning If your vehicle is equipped with rear seat entertainment you can view the menu and playlist from your CD on the video screen Turn on the video screen with the power button on the remote control to view and navigate the menu and playlists See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information Using the AUX Display If Equipped If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment you will see an AUX screen as you press through the SRCE key When AUX is selected in the front the audio from the device plugged into the auxiliary jacks in the rear will be played over the vehicle speakers 298 You have the ability to select between AUX and DVD video on the video screen while listening to AUX audio See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information on the auxiliary jacks SRCE Source Press this pushbutton to select the AUX display F2 DVD Press this pushbutton to select DVD video on the video screen in the rear with AUX audio on the vehicle speakers F5 AUX Press this pushbutton to select AUX video on the video screen in the rear with AUX audio on the vehicle speakers Configurable Radio Display Keys This feature allows you to customize the four keys that are located on each side of the radio display to make it easier to adjust the radio features To program the configurable radio display keys perform the following steps 1 Press the tune sel knob to enter the main me
461. truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking on page 326 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddle
462. tructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation with three round LED Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter 162 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section or for assistance see Customer Assistance Offices on page 546 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Programming Universal Home Remote 4 The indicator light wi
463. ttle Service Shuttle Service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation and participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters for the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs and public transportation is used as shuttle service the reimbursement is limited to the associated shuttle allowance contact your dealer and must be supported by original receipts In addition in the United States should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts 553 Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair Taxi reimbursement may also be available if you meet the eligibility for a courtesy rental and a rental vehicle is not practical for your requirements Rental and taxi reimbursement will be limited contact your dealer and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental
464. ttons A on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to make sure it has locked into position Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 23 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature which may turn off the passenger s frontal airbag If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again 31 Rear Seat Passe
465. ture are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for additional information 100 Remote Start Ready If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturers remote vehicle start feature If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature the RKE transmitter will have an extended range that allows locking or unlocking of the vehicle from approximately 197 feet 60 m away See your dealer if you would like to add the manufacturers remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle Doors and Locks Door Locks CAUTION Continued e Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a There are several ways to lock and unlock the moving vehicle When a door is doors locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the To lock or unlock the door from the inside slide doors whenever you drive the manual lever up or down or us
466. ture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog or defrost modes 3 Defog This mode directs air to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When you select this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 223 W Defrost This mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield side window vents and some to the floor vents In this mode the system will automatically force outside air into your vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QP Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger will turn off automatically after it has been activated T
467. ued 440 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good be damaged too oe EaR battery Use a remote positive terminal if Before you connect the cables here are some the vehicle has one basic things you should know Positive f will go to positive or to a remote positive 8 Now connect the black negative cable to terminal if the vehicle has one Negative the negative terminal of the good battery will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks the next step The other end of the negative cable doe
468. uid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 533 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 432 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message is displayed you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for reservoir location Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water e Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well a
469. uld be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 232 434 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 523 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak a TA After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the they will have to be replaced Do not area around the cap before removing it This let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir ae e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can Z CAUTION be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it i off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle With t
470. uld be drained if you leave the key in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the engine off You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This position starts the engine Key In the Ignition Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves If you leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle a chime will sound when you open the driver s door Always remember to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you This will lock your ignition and transaxle Also always remember to lock the doors The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK The radio power windows if the vehicle has a sunroof and the OnStar System will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK these features will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened 125 Starting the Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position that i
471. ull but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the center of the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off See DIC Operation and Displays on page 243 and DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for the displays available DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected A digital soeedometer also appears at the bottom of the DIC display The digital speedometer can be enabled or disabled See DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 for more information 243 DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization
472. ult size is sitting in the right front passengers seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger s airbag 82 A CAUTION A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light in the Stowing of articles under the passenger s instrument panel cluster ever comes on seat or between the passenger s seat and stays on it means that something may cushion and seatback may interfere with be wrong with the airbag system If this the proper operation of the passenger ever happens have the vehicle serviced sensing system promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 229 for more on this including important safety information Aftermarket equipment such as seat covers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Adding Equipment to Your Airb
473. und in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members Refer to www MyGMLink com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle My GM Canada Canada only My GM Canada is a password protected section of gmcanada com where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers My Driveway Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle My Preferences Manage your profile subscribe to E News and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up to My GM Canada visit the My GM Canada section within www gmcanada com 545 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones T
474. ur vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot this message will display along with a continuous chime Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON If a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km this message will display and a chime will sound Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID If the washer fluid level is low this message will display Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 406 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 432 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on your DIC The default settings for the customization featur
475. ure wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 380 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 123 Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different positions A LOCK This position locks the ignition and transmission It is a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to LOCK 124 Notice Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is all the way in If it is turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the accessory ignition position and the RUN position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition position for a long period of time C RUN This is the position for driving It is the position the switch returns to after the engine starts and you release the key The battery co
476. ure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door A CAUTION Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 39 or Infants and Young Children on page 42 69 There is an airbag readiness light on the e instrument panel cluster which shows the FX airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 229 for more information 70 Where Are the Airbags The driver s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel The right front passenger s airbag is in the The roof mounted rollover airbag for the driver and instrument panel on the passenger s side the person seated directly behind the driver is located in the ceili
477. urn Signal Multifunction Lever 196 Turn and Lane Change Signals 196 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 197 FlaSh to PaSS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 198 Windshield Wipers ssec 198 Rainsense Wipers cscs 199 Windshield Washer seeen 200 Cruise Control surettaa assita 201 Exterior Lamps enrcoriononisnsnranaio 204 Headlamps on Reminder eenen 209 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 209 Automatic Headlamp System n a 210 Fog LAMPS vvsececs vase cnr vessecens aeesaaeveeena ies 211 Exterior Cargo Lamps s 211 Instrument Panel Brightness 2 0 211 Dome Lamps orrena eearemnouads 212 Dome Lamp Override cceesseeeeeeeeeees 212 Entry Exit Lighting sieisen 212 Reading Lamps seeen 212 Instrument Panel Battery Run Down Protection aaen 212 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 213 Accessory Power Outlet S e e 217 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 218 Analog ClOCK scoenen noain 218 Climate Controls a enna 219 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 219 Outlet Adjustment eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 224 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 225 Instrument Panel Cluster 0 0 0 0 226 Speedometer and Odometer 008 227 Trip QOOMOStSR siceissssgectaned ed dscsbsanvadaartecaceente 227 Tachometer scien cave signaka ueedcaea a AEA 227 Safety Belt Reminder Light 0 20
478. urned on and your key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on or close and re open the door In the AUTO mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends if enabled in the DIC See Exit Lighting under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 257 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e The transmission is not in PARK P e The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only your DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps will not be on The instrument panel will not be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transaxle must be in the Park P position before the DRL lamps can be turned off As with any vehi
479. ustable throttle and brake pedal that lets you change their positions This feature is designed for shorter drivers since the pedals can not move farther away from the standard position but can move toward the driver for better pedal reach The feature will not operate when the vehicle is in REVERSE R or while using the cruise control a SD gt The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the center console below the climate control system Press the right and left arrows to move the pedals either closer or further from your body 128 Your vehicle has a memory function which allows the pedals to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 12 for more information Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18 C as noted on the cord To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it wa
480. utlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the electrical equipment you install Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 217 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter The front ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the center console near the cupholders if the vehicle has them Press on the access door to open it and use the ashtray and lighter Notice If you put papers pins or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull it from the center console Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is Secure To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go
481. utton once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter 260 LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 93 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior la
482. uttons to change tracks at a rate of one per second TUNE SEL knob Turn to the left one notch to go to the start of the current track Turn it again to go to the previous track or turn to the right one notch to go to the next track K l Scan Press this double arrow button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds and then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning If your vehicle has rear seat entertainment you can view the track details from your CD on the video screen Turn on the video screen with the power button on the remote control to view and navigate the tracks See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 302 for more information Playing an MP3 Formatted Disc See Using an MP3 CD earlier in this section for additional information F3 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast reverse mode Holding the pushbutton will play in reverse at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play in reverse at 32 times the normal speed Release the pushbutton to return to normal play mode A quick press of this pushbutton will go to the beginning of the previous folder F4 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to enter fast forward mode Holding the pushbutton will play at four times the normal speed After holding it for more than four seconds it will play at 32 times the normal speed Re
483. vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental 554 Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Cadillac and General Motors of Canada reserve the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at their sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may
484. w And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 372 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 384 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to the maximum of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs
485. w ice or mud on it e The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed e The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 Ibs 75 kg sitting on the driver s seat e Tires should be properly inflated e The spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle s low beam headlamps The high beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam headlamps are aimed properly 447 To adjust the vertical aim do the following 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 405 for more information 2 Locate the center of the projector lens of the low beam headlamp 3 Measure the distance from the ground to the center of the projector lens of the low beam headlamp Record the distance 448 4 At the wall measure from the ground upward A to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it 5 Draw or tape a horizontal line B on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4 Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build up which may cause damage to the headlamp 6 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat su
486. w fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph 29 to 40 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range 73 Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e lf the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like
487. when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 2 Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc 309 L Subtitles Press this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source If your vehicle has a third row video screen the AUX button will control the source display on the second row video screen and the third row video screen as described in the table below Aux Button Second Row Third Row Press Screen Screen Default State No Press DVD Media DVD Media s Aux Video Aux Video Aux Video Source Aux Video Third Press DVD Media Return to Default Return to 310 Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection amp Clear Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track number
488. will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL default The chime volume will be set to a normal level 263 LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it PARK TILT MIRRORS This feature allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 149 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R 264 DRIVER MIRROR The driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REV
489. with Intellibeam OnStar Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with Intellibeam OnStar compass and temperature display For more information on OnStar see OnStar System on page 152 For more information on Intellibeam see Intellibeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System under Exterior Lamps on page 204 The mirror includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face When on the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven Outside temperature is also shown in the display Automatic Dimming Your vehicle is equipped with an inside automatic dimming rearview mirror The automatic dimming feature is activated whenever the vehicle is turned on and dims only during nighttime driving Compass Operation AUTO ED Press and hold the auto highbeam button for approximately three seconds to turn the compass temperature display on or off When the ignition and the display features are on the display will show two character boxes for about two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading and temperature Compass Calibration If after two seconds the display does not show the correct direction N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder
490. wo digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission transaxle power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
491. would be very close to the inflating airbag Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear facing child restraint in the passenger s position Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a L
492. xt available source either DVD AUX if your vehicle has this feature or radio A Eject Press this button to eject a CD Eject may be activated with the ignition and the radio off If the CD is not removed after a short time the CD will be brought back into the CD player for storage CD Messages If the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e The format of the CD may not be compatible See MP3 Format earlier in this section e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Using the DVD Player Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in If the ignition and the radio are on the CD or DVD will begin playing A DVD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing until the radio is on and sourced to DVD The DVD player can be c
493. y Exit Lighting Your vehicle has an illuminated entry exit feature When a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the out position Reading Lamps If your vehicle has reading lamps press the button located next to the lamp to turn it on or off Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn each one on or off press the button located next to the lamp The lamps cannot be adjusted Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK This will help prevent the battery from running down Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it is designed to help you park while in REVERSE R It operates only at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h URPA helps make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles The URPA system detects objects that are close to the rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below hood or tailgate level The system detects objects up to 8 feet 2 5 m behind your vehicle The URPA sensors determine how close these objects are from your bumper within this area A CAUTION Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist system the driver must check carefully before backing up The syst
494. y reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel Heated Steering Wheel The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel steering wheel before you drive You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room The button for this when you enter and exit the vehicle feature is located on the left side of the gi steering wheel Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or off A light on the button will display while the feature is on The steering wheel will take about three minutes to start heating The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place 195 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following e Turn and Lane Change Signals See Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 196 e 20 2D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 197 e Flash to Pass See Flash to Pass on page 198 196 e amp Windshield Wipers See Windshield Wipers on page 198 e Windshield Washer See Windshield Washe
495. y to drive straight up the hill if at all possible make you more visible to oncoming traffic If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route 346 e If the engine has stopped running you will need to restart it With the brake pedal A CAUTION pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart Driving to the top crest of a hill at full the engine Then shift to REVERSE R speed can cause an accident There could release the parking brake and slowly back be a drop off embankment cliff or even down the hill as straight as possible in another vehicle You could be seriously REVERSE R injured or killed As you near the top of a e As you are backing down the hill put your left hill slow down and stay alert hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if the wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that you back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the If this happens there are some things you possibility of a rollover should do and there are some things you must not do First here is what you should do e Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake e If the engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release
496. yed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 86 Notice If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows the airbag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering for roof mounted rollover airbags Do not open or break the airbag coverings Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used du
497. your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like anti lock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals 397 Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners Englis
498. ys stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the 1 Put the tire A on the ground at the rear of spare tire carrier Refer to the following graphics the vehicle with the valve stem pointed and instructions to help you down and to the rear 2 Tilt the tire retainer D downward and through the wheel opening Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel A Spare Tire Flat F Hoist End of Tire Valve Stem Extension Tool Pointed Down G Hoist Shaft B Hoist Assembly Access Hole C Hoist Cable H Wheel Wrench D Tire Retainer Jack Handle Extension 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions I E Hoist Shaft J Spare Tire Lock and wheel wrench H as shown 493 4 Insert the open end of the extension F through the hole in the rear bumper G hoist shaft access hole 5 Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench 7 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable 8 Reinstall the spare tire lock
499. zes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size brand and type tires on all wheels Your vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle When new your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on your vehicle it will not affect vehicle handling A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See

Cadillac 2007 Escalade EXT Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents